®
™
Your Palm Treo 680
Smartphone
User Guide
Contents
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Chapter 1: Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Treo 680 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Inserting the SIM card and battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Setting up your computer for synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Chapter 3: Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Turning your Treo 680 on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
What can I do when I’m on a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
How many minutes have I used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Entering names and phone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Using a hands-free device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
iii
Chapter 4: Your email and other messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Which email application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
The VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Connections with Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Chapter 6: Your photos, videos, and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Pocket Tunes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Chapter 7: Your personal information organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Chapter 8: Your memos and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Documents To Go Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Chapter 9: Your application and info management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
iv
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Chapter 10: Your personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
System sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Locking your Treo and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Connecting to a VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Chapter 11: Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Desktop software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Resetting your Treo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Making room on your Treo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
v
Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
vi
•
•
•
Text and multimedia messaging
MP3 player
Welcome
Applications for reading, creating, and
editing Microsoft Office files and
viewing PDF files
Congratulations on the purchase of your
Palm® Treo™ 680 smartphone! In one
compact and indispensable device, you
now have all of the following:
•
Software for entering names,
addresses, and more on your computer,
and then transferring them to your
smartphone with one press of a button
•
Contacts application that stores the
names, phone numbers, and even
pictures of friends, family, business
contacts—everyone you stay in touch
with
NOTE Phone and text messaging services
require a service contract with your
wireless service provider. Web, email, and
multimedia messaging services require a
service contract and data services, such as
GPRS or EDGE, from your wireless service
provider. Data speeds vary based on
network availability and capacity.
•
•
Email application for receiving and
sending email (business and personal)
®
Palm OS personal info applications for
storing your appointments, to-do lists,
memos, and more
•
•
Expansion card slot that accepts cards
(MultiMediaCard/SD/SDIO; sold
separately) for storing music files,
videos, dictionaries, games, and lots of
other applications
What’s in the box?
You should have received all the following
items in the Treo 680 box:
Hardware
A VGA (640x480) digital camera for
snapping photos and capturing short
videos
•
•
Treo 680
SIM card from your wireless service
provider (not included with all models)
W E L C O M E
1
Documentation and software
KEY TERM SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)
card The smartcard that you insert into your
smartphone and identifies you to the mobile
network. It contains your mobile account
information, such as your phone number and
the services to which you subscribe. Phone
book entries and SMS messages can also be
stored on the SIM card.
•
•
•
Read This First setup booklet
Quick Reference Guide
Palm Software Installation CD, which
includes the following:
• Palm® Desktop software
• Bonus software for your smartphone
• Your Palm Treo 680 Smartphone User
Guide (this guide)
•
•
Rechargeable battery
AC charger with international adapter(s)
(if required in your region)
•
Palm warranty
•
•
USB sync cable
Headset
W E L C O M E
2
card must be inserted into your
smartphone. Without a SIM card, you
can only make emergency calls, such as
112 or 911.
What do I need to
get started?
•
You must be in a location where you are
within coverage of your wireless service
provider’s network.
This guide helps you set up your Treo 680
and quickly learn to use it. To get started,
you need all the items that came in the
the following:
•
•
An electrical outlet
The computer with which you want to
synchronize your personal information
•
A SIM card. If you do not already have a
SIM card and your smartphone box did
not contain a SIM card, you need to
contact your wireless service provider
to get one. Be sure to sign up for a
mobile account with data services. To
use your smartphone on your wireless
service provider’s network, the SIM
NOTE To use email, web browsing, and
multimedia messaging, your wireless
service provider plan must include data
services. Please contact your wireless
service provider for details about your data
service options.
W E L C O M E
3
W E L C O M E
4
CHAPTER
1
Setting up
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Palm® Treo™ 680
smartphone. You’re about to discover the many things about
your smartphone that will help you better manage your life and
have fun, too.
As you become more familiar with your smartphone, you’ll
want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it
uniquely yours. But first, take these few easy steps to set up
your smartphone and get it running.
Benefits
•
Know where your smartphone
controls are located
•
Establish a link between your
smartphone and your computer
•
Start using your smartphone right
away
In this chapter
S E T T I N G U P
1
Treo 680 overview
Front view
5-way navigator and
Center button
Earpiece
Indicator light (phone
and charge indicator)
Power/End
Applications
Volume
Side button
Menu
Messaging
Calendar
Send
Phone
TIP Protect your screen. Be careful to store
your smartphone away from items that might
scratch or crush the screen. Visit
www.palm.com/treo680gsm to find carrying
cases and other useful accessories.
DID YOU KNOW
?
When your smartphone
screen is on, you can press and hold the Side
button to open the Voice Memo application.
You can also change your button settings and
select an application of your choice; see
Reassigning buttons for details.
7
S E T T I N G U P
1
Back view
Speaker
Stylus
Battery door
release
Self-portrait mirror
Camera lens
Headset jack
Expansion slot door
Multi-connector
Microphone
IMPORTANT The Treo 680 speaker
includes a large magnet, so be sure to
keep your smartphone away from credit
cards or other items that could be
demagnetized.
8
S E T T I N G U P
1
Top view
NOTE Your SIM card may already be
installed in your smartphone. Follow steps
1–3 to check. If a SIM card did not come
with your smartphone, you may already
have one; otherwise, your wireless service
provider will give you one when you
subscribe.
1
Use one hand to press the Battery
door release button and use your other
hand to slide the battery door
downward to remove it from your
smartphone.
Infrared (IR) port Ringer switch
DID YOU KNOW The Ringer switch silences all
?
sounds at once. You don’t need to hunt for Off
buttons all over the device.
Battery door
release
Inserting the SIM
card and battery
Your SIM card contains account
information such as your phone number
and voicemail access number. To use the
phone, email, or web features, the SIM
card must be inserted in your smartphone.
2
3
If the battery is installed, remove it.
Slide the SIM tray out of the slot inside
the smartphone. If the SIM card is
already installed, skip to step 6.
9
S E T T I N G U P
1
6
Align the metal contacts on the battery
with the contacts inside the battery
compartment, insert the battery into the
compartment at a 45-degree angle, and
then press it into place.
4
Align the notch on the SIM card with
the notch in the SIM tray. Insert the
notched end of the SIM card into the
SIM tray, and then press the other end
of the card until it falls into place.
Battery
contacts
Smartphone
contacts
Notch
5
Slide the SIM tray back into the slot
inside the smartphone.
IMPORTANT Use the battery that came
with your Treo 680. Do not use a battery
from another Treo model in your Treo 680.
Similarly, do not use the Treo 680 battery in
another Treo model. Using a battery that is
designed for another Treo model can
damage your Treo 680. For info on
10
S E T T I N G U P
1
replacement batteries, see Replacing the
TIP The power-saving feature turns off the Treo
screen after a period of inactivity. To wake up
the screen, press and release Power/End,
and then press Center on the 5-way to turn off
Keyguard.
7
8
Slide the battery door onto the back of
the smartphone until it clicks into place.
Your Treo screen wakes up and begins
the setup process. When the language
selection screen appears, select the
language you want to use, and then
follow the onscreen instructions to set
up your Treo.
Charging the battery
The battery comes with a sufficient charge
to complete the setup process and activate
your phone. After activation, we
recommend charging your smartphone for
three hours (or until the indicator light is
solid green) to give it a full charge. See
Maximizing battery life for tips on
TIP If your Treo does not turn on, you need to
connect it to the AC charger. If it still does not
turn on after being connected to the AC
charger for five minutes, then do a soft reset.
maximizing the life of your Treo battery.
IMPORTANT Always use the same
language for your Treo, your computer
operating system, and your desktop
software. Otherwise, you may lose
information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for
mismatched language setups.
TIP To avoid draining the battery, charge your
smartphone every day, especially if you use
your phone often.
DID YOU KNOW
?
If your battery ever becomes
fully drained, your info is still stored safely on
your smartphone until you recharge the
battery or connect your smartphone to a
power source.
11
S E T T I N G U P
1
1
If necessary, connect the international
adapter to the AC charger plug.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can also trickle charge your
smartphone without the AC charger by
connecting it to your computer with the sync
cable. However, it takes longer to charge the
battery without the AC charger, and if your
laptop isn’t plugged into a power source, it can
drain the laptop’s battery. For the quickest
charge time, use the AC charger.
2
3
Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
Connect the charger cable to the
bottom of your smartphone. Make sure
the arrow on the connector is facing up,
toward the screen.
TIP When trickle charging your smartphone
with the sync cable, the indicator light may
not turn on. To make sure the battery is
charging, check the onscreen battery indicator.
4
To confirm that your smartphone is
charging, check the indicator light on
your smartphone.
• Solid red indicates that your
smartphone is charging.
• Solid green indicates that your
smartphone is fully charged.
Indicator light
12
S E T T I N G U P
1
TIP If the battery is fully drained, it may take a
few moments for the indicator light to turn on
when you begin charging.
TIP To see exactly how much power is left in
your battery, tap the onscreen battery icon.
TIP If the indicator light does not turn on when
you connect your smartphone to the AC
charger, double-check the cable connection
and the electrical outlet to which it is
connected.
Battery icon
icon displays the charging status:
A red lightning bolt indicates that
the battery is connected to a wall
outlet and is charging.
Maximizing battery
life
A green lightning bolt indicates that
the battery is connected to a wall
outlet and is fully charged.
Battery life depends on how you use your
smartphone. You can maximize the life of
your battery by following a few easy
guidelines:
A partial battery without a lightning
bolt indicates that the battery is not
connected to a wall outlet and it
has some power.
IMPORTANT Use the battery that came
with your Treo 680. Do not use a battery
from another Treo in your Treo 680.
Similarly, do not use the Treo 680 battery in
another Treo. Using a battery that is
An almost empty battery that is red
at the bottom indicates that you
need to charge the battery
immediately.
13
S E T T I N G U P
1
designed for another Treo can damage your
Treo 680. For info on replacement
•
•
If you don’t plan to use the wireless
features on your Treo for a while, turn
on and off) and let all calls be picked up
by voicemail.
TIP You can buy an extra battery as a spare for
long airplane trips or periods of heavy use. To
purchase batteries that are compatible with
As with any mobile phone, if you are in
an area with no wireless coverage, your
Treo searches for a signal, which
consumes power. If you cannot move to
an area of better coverage, temporarily
turn off your phone. While your phone is
off, you can continue to use the
•
•
Charge your smartphone whenever you
can. Charge it overnight. The battery
has a much longer useful life when it is
topped off frequently, rather than
charging it after it is fully drained.
nonwireless features of your Treo.
•
•
Turn down the screen brightness (see
Decrease the settings in Power
Preferences and turn off Beam Receive
The wireless features (phone, email,
messaging, and web) and media
features (camera, media players,
eBooks, and games) of your
®
•
Turn off the Bluetooth feature if you’re
smartphone consume more power than
its organizer features. Speakerphone
usage also consumes more power than
using the earpiece. If you use the
wireless, speakerphone, and media
features often, keep an eye on the
battery icon and charge when
necessary.
not using it. See Connecting to a
14
S E T T I N G U P
1
Making your first call
1
2
Press Phone
.
If prompted, press Center
to turn
keyboard (Keyguard) for more info).
5
6
Press Send
to dial the number.
If prompted, press Center
to select
Yes and turn on your phone.
Center
TIP If you are inside a coverage area and
cannot complete a call, contact your wireless
service provider for assistance.
TIP If Check SIM Card appears in the title bar,
TIP If No Service appears in the title bar,
you’re outside a wireless coverage area. If you
believe you are in a wireless coverage area
and this problem persists, contact your
wireless service provider for assistance.
7
After you finish the call, press Power/
End
to end the call.
Adjusting call volume
While a call is in progress, press the
Volume button on the side of your
smartphone to adjust the call volume.
3
4
Press Left to select the Dial Pad
tab.
Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the
number you want to call.
•
To increase the volume, press the upper
half of the Volume button.
15
S E T T I N G U P
1
•
To decrease the volume, press the
TIP If your phone number doesn’t appear in
Phone Info, make sure your SIM card is
lower half of the Volume button.
properly inserted in your smartphone. If your
phone number still does not appear in Phone
Info, your wireless service provider may not
support this feature. Look for your phone
number on the plastic holder to which the SIM
card was attached. If you still need assistance,
please contact your wireless service provider.
Volume
Side button
Setting up your
computer for
What’s my phone number?
1
Make sure your phone is on (see
synchronization
2
3
4
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Why set up a connection between your
smartphone and your computer? So you
can synchronize. Why synchronize? Here
are two good reasons:
Select Options, and then select Phone
Info.
•
It’s easier to enter names, phone
numbers, and addresses using the big
keyboard on your computer than the
keyboard on your smartphone. Whether
you enter or change information on your
computer (using Palm® Desktop
Look here for
your phone
number
software or Microsoft Outlook for
16
S E T T I N G U P
1
Windows) or on your smartphone, you
automatically update the info in both
places when you synchronize. So
• Available USB port
•
Mac OS X version 10.2 or later
• 128MB of total memory (RAM)
• 190MB of free hard disk space
• CD drive
there’s no need to enter the info twice.
•
You have a backup copy of all your info.
Should anything happen to your
smartphone, your info still exists on
your computer.
• Available USB port
Upgrading from another Palm OS® device
We strongly recommend that you
synchronize your smartphone with your
computer frequently to keep your
information up-to-date (and backed up) in
both locations.
NOTE If you are setting up your first Palm
You can transfer all compatible applications
and information from your previous Palm
OS device—whether it’s a handheld or a
Treo— to your new Treo 680, so long as the
space taken up by all the info you want to
transfer is 64MB or less. This includes your
calendar events, contacts, memos, and
tasks, as well as your application settings
and any compatible third-party applications
and files.
Before you can synchronize, you need to
install the desktop synchronization
software and connect the sync cable to
your computer.
System requirements
Your computer should meet the following
minimum system profiles for Windows or
Mac computers:
•
Windows 2000 or XP (or later)
• 32MB of available memory (RAM)
• 170MB of free hard disk space
• CD drive
When you install the desktop software
from the Palm Software Installation CD,
some third-party applications may be
quarantined because they are not
compatible with the Palm OS software
17
S E T T I N G U P
1
version 5.4.9 on your Treo 680.
• At the bottom of the screen, select
Quarantined files are not installed on your
Treo 680, nor are they deleted; these files
are placed in a new folder on your
Size.
computer: C:\Program Files\Palm\<device
name>\PalmOS5 Incompatible Apps.
(Can’t find a Palm folder in Program Files?
Then look for a folder labeled palmOne or
Handspring instead. For more info, see I
IMPORTANT Do not synchronize your Treo
680 with any previous versions of
Palm Desktop software.
• Look at the numbers on the Free
Space line and subtract the number
on the left from the number on the
right to calculate the space used. For
example, on the device shown here,
22.4 – 17.5 = 4.9. This means that
4.9MB of space is occupied on this
device.
TIP We do not recommend using third-party
utilities that back up your old device’s
information onto an expansion card and then
transfer the info to your Treo 680. Such
methods transfer all applications to your
smartphone, including ones that are not
designed to work with Palm OS version 5.4.9.
2
If the space occupied on your previous
device is 64MB or less, then go to step
3. If the space occupied is greater than
64MB, then do any of the following to
reduce the storage space you’re using
before you go to the next step:
1
Calculate how much space your apps
and info occupy on your previous Palm
OS device:
• Delete any third-party applications
that you no longer use.
• In Applications View, open the menus.
• Select Info on the App menu.
18
S E T T I N G U P
1
• Move large files, such as eBooks and
images, to an expansion card.
Tasks) or all info and apps (excluding
apps known to be incompatible).
• Move third-party applications to an
expansion card.
• Select a device name for your Treo
680; be sure to select the same name
that you used for your old device.
(This is the name that appears in the
User list in Palm Desktop software.)
• Purge old info in applications such as
Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do),
and email. Refer to the
documentation that came with your
previous device for instructions on
these items.
6
7
MAC ONLY If you have pictures on
your previous device, copy them from
your previous device to an expansion
card or beam them to your Treo 680.
3
4
Synchronize your previous device with
your previous desktop software to back
up your information one last time.
If you plan to continue using your
previous device, perform a hard reset
on your previous device to remove its
associated device name. (See the
documentation that came with your
previous device for instructions on
performing a hard reset.) Each device
you synchronize with your computer
must have a unique name. The next
time you synchronize your previous
device with your computer, be sure to
assign it a new name.
Install the desktop synchronization
software from your new Palm Software
Installation CD (see Installing the
5
During the installation process, sync
your Treo 680 with your new desktop
software as instructed. When
prompted, do the following:
• Connect your Treo 680 to your
computer (see Connecting your
If any third-party applications are
quarantined during the installation, do not
manually install them. Contact the
third-party developer for software updates
• Indicate whether you want to sync
only the info in your PIM apps
(Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and
19
S E T T I N G U P
1
and info about compatibility with your Treo
680.
1
2
Close any applications that are currently
running on your computer, including
those that are minimized. Your
computer needs to have all its
resources available to install the
software.
TIP If you have trouble upgrading or finding
Insert the Palm Software Installation CD
into the CD drive on your computer.
Installing the desktop synchronization
software
IMPORTANT Even if you already own a
Palm OS device and have installed a
previous version of the desktop software,
you must install the software from the
Palm Software Installation CD that came
with your Treo 680.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing
on a computer at work, make sure your
computer is configured to let you install
new software. Contact your company’s
IT department for help.
3
4
If you are installing on a Mac,
double-click the CD icon on the desktop,
and then double-click the
TIP If you want to sync info with applications
other than Palm Desktop or Microsoft
Outlook, you need to purchase additional
third-party sync software. This sync software
is sometimes called a conduit.
PalmSoftware.pkg icon.
When the installation wizard opens,
follow the onscreen instructions. Please
20
S E T T I N G U P
1
note these important points about the
installation process:
Connecting your smartphone to your
computer
• When the language selection screen
appears, select the same language
you selected on your Treo 680.
After you install the desktop software (see
software), you’re ready to connect your
smartphone to your computer.
• WINDOWS ONLY You can choose
which desktop software you want to
use for synchronization:
Palm Desktop software or Microsoft
Outlook.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To set up your
computer, you need the sync cable that
came with your Treo 680.
1
If necessary, connect the international
adapter to the AC charger plug.
NOTE Whether you select to synchronize
with Microsoft Outlook or Palm Desktop
software, Palm Desktop software is still
installed on your computer. If you use
Outlook as your desktop email application,
select Outlook as your desktop
synchronization software. Remember that
when you enter information on your
computer, enter it in the software you
selected in this step.
2
3
Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
Plug the USB sync cable into an
available USB port or a powered USB
hub on your computer.
TIP For best performance, plug your sync
cable directly into a USB port on your
computer. If your computer has USB ports on
both the front and back, we suggest using the
back port; the front port is often a low-power
port. If you use a USB hub, make sure the hub
has its own power supply.
• The install process prompts you to
connect your smartphone to your
computer. Go to the next section.
0
21
S E T T I N G U P
1
4
With the sync button facing up, connect
5
Connect the charger cable to the
bottom of your smartphone.
the sync cable to the bottom of your
smartphone. Do not press the sync
button until you are instructed to do so.
You are now ready to synchronize; go to
Sync cable
Sync button
22
S E T T I N G U P
1
info up-to-date (and backed up) in
both locations.
Synchronizing
information—the
basics
The info from all the following applications
is updated by default each time you sync
your smartphone with your desktop
software:
Synchronizing means that info you enter or
change in one place (your smartphone or
your computer) is automatically entered or
changed in the other; so there’s no need to
enter the info twice. We strongly
recommend that you sync your
smartphone with your computer or
corporate server frequently to keep your
0
How each application syncs depends on
your computer type and the desktop
software you are using, as follows:
Computer type
Windows
Desktop software
Microsoft Outlook
What syncs and where
•
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and
Tasks sync with Outlook
•
Pictures & Videos syncs with
Palm Desktop
Windows
Mac
Palm Desktop
Palm Desktop
All apps sync with Palm Desktop
All apps sync with Palm Desktop
23
S E T T I N G U P
1
Messages on both your computer and
your smartphone indicate that
synchronization is in progress.
TIP For more sync options, including which
apps sync, see Synchronizing information—
3
Wait until you see the message on your
smartphone that the HotSync operation
is complete; then disconnect the sync
cable. Do not disconnect the sync cable
until you see this message.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To sync your info,
you must install Palm Desktop software
from the Palm Software Installation CD
that came with your Treo 680—even if you
sync with Outlook or another third-party
application. See Installing the desktop
synchronization software for instructions.
TIP Problems synchronizing? See
Synchronization for troubleshooting
suggestions.
1
Connect your Treo 680 to your
computer, as described in Connecting
If you’re finishing your initial setup, you
now have the option to install bonus
software from the Palm Software
Installation CD. If you choose to install
some of the bonus software, you need to
sync again to install the software on your
smartphone. You can also install bonus
software later; see Installing bonus
2
Press the sync button on the sync
cable.
TIP For info on locating your pictures and
videos on your computer, see Viewing
Sync button
24
CHAPTER
2
Moving around on your
Palm® Treo™ 680 smartphone
Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you
figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the
avenues run east/west? Learning to move around on your
smartphone is similar. Most Palm OS® applications use the
same set of controls. So once you learn how to use these
controls on your Palm® Treo™ 680 smartphone, you’ll be driving
all over town and you won’t even need a map.
Benefits
•
•
•
Find and open applications quickly
Access extra features with menus
•
Access many more characters and
symbols than are displayed on the
keyboard
Move around in applications with
one hand, using the 5-way
navigator
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E
2
Moving around the
screen
TIP Some third-party applications may not
work with the 5-way navigator, and you must
use the stylus instead
DID YOU KNOW
?
In this guide, we use arrow
icons to indicate directions on the 5-way.
These are different from any onscreen arrows
that you tap with your stylus or select with the
5-way to display pick lists.
To move around the Treo 680 screen, you
can use the 5-way navigator for
one-handed navigation, or you can tap
items on the screen with the stylus. With
use, you will find your own favorite way to
scroll, highlight, and select menu items.
The 5-way includes the following buttons:
Center
Up
Left
Right
Down
27
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E
2
Highlighting and selecting items
On most screens, one item—a button, a
list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by
default. The highlight identifies which item
is affected by your next action. Use Left
,
Right , Up , and Down on the
5-way to move the highlight from one item
to another.
TIP If the item you want doesn’t appear on the
screen, try tapping the onscreen scroll arrows
to view more info.
Colored background: When a phone
number, text, an email address, a web link,
or an item in a list is highlighted, the item is
displayed as white text against a colored
background. Examples of lists include the
Contacts list, the Messaging Inbox, and the
Tasks list.
Learn to recognize the highlight. It can take
two forms:
Border glow: When an entire screen, an
onscreen button (such as Done, New, or
OK), or a pick list is highlighted, a glow
appears around its border. If an entire
screen is highlighted, the glow appears at
the top and bottom of the screen only.
After highlighting an item, you can select or
activate it by pressing Center
tapping the item with the stylus.
, or by
TIP When a border appears at the top and
bottom of a list screen, press Center on the
5-way to highlight the first item in the list.
TIP After you open an application (see
Opening applications), experiment with using
the 5-way to highlight various screen
elements.
28
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E
2
Highlighting text
Selecting menu items
You can use the stylus to highlight text on
the screen.
Many applications have menus to give you
access to additional features. These menus
are usually hidden from view, but they
•
Tap and drag the stylus across the text
you want to highlight.
appear when you press Menu
. To get
the most out of your smartphone, it’s a
good idea to familiarize yourself with the
additional features available through the
various application menus.
•
•
To highlight a word, double-tap it.
To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.
Accessing command buttons
1
Press Menu
to display an
In most applications, command buttons
such as New, OK, and Details appear at the
bottom of the screen. In many cases, you
can jump directly to these buttons instead
of scrolling to them.
application’s menus.
•
•
•
From a list screen, such as the Memos
list, press Right to jump to the first
button.
Menu shortcut
From a screen where you create or edit
entries, such as Contact Edit, press
Center
to jump to the first button.
2
3
4
Press Right and Left to switch
From a dialog box, such as Edit
between menus.
Categories, press Up
or Down to
Press Up
menu item.
and Down to highlight a
scroll to the buttons.
Press Center
to select the menu
item, or press Menu
to close the
menu and cancel your selection.
29
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E
2
•
To exit the pick list without making a
selection, press Left or Right
Stylus: Use your stylus to tap the pick list.
TIP Most menu items have menu shortcuts
listed in the menu. To use a menu shortcut,
press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don’t
have to see the menu item to use the menu
shortcut. For example, when you’re in
Calendar, you can press Menu + N to create a
new event.
.
•
•
Tap the item you want from the list.
To exit the pick list without making a
selection, tap outside the list.
Selecting options in a pick list
A range of options is often presented in a
type of menu called a pick list, which can
be identified by a downward-pointing
arrow. Pick lists are different from the
application menus previously described.
The application menus give you access to
additional features and pick lists let you
select the contents for a particular field.
You can select items from a pick list with
the 5-way or the stylus.
5-way: Use the 5-way
to highlight the
pick list, and then press Center
to
display the items in the list.
•
•
Press Up
the item you want.
and Down to highlight
Press Center
to select the
highlighted item.
30
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E
2
•
To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/
Find twice. To turn it off, press
Shift/Find once. When Caps Lock
TIP When using the keyboard, most people
find it easiest to hold the Treo with two hands
and use the tips of both thumbs to press the
keys.
is on, an underlined up arrow
appears in the lower-right corner of the
screen.
DID YOU KNOW The Treo 680 includes a
?
Entering numbers, punctuation, and
symbols
keyboard backlight that turns on and off when
the screen turns on or off. The backlight also
dims when an active call lasts longer than a
specified period of time. See Optimizing
power settings to adjust the automatic
shut-off and dimming intervals.
Numbers, punctuation, and symbols
appear above the letters on the keys.
To enter these characters, do one of
the following:
Entering lowercase and uppercase letters
Symbol
Letter
•
To enter lowercase letters, press the
desired keys.
•
To enter an uppercase letter, press
•
Press Option
key with the desired character shown
above the letter. You don’t need to press
, and then press the
Shift/Find
key. You don’t need to press and hold
Shift/Find while entering a letter.
and then press a letter
and hold Option
while pressing the
When Shift is active, an up arrow
appears in the lower-right corner of the
screen.
second key. When Option is active, the
symbol appears in the lower-right
corner of the screen.
•
To turn Option Lock on, press Option
twice. To turn it off, press Option
once. When Option Lock is on, the
symbol
corner of the screen.
appears in the lower-right
32
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E
2
1
Enter the character that corresponds to
the symbol or accented character you
want. See the table on the next page.
DID YOU KNOW Some application views
?
automatically default to Option Lock, such as
the Dial Pad tab in the Phone application or
the Calculator. In this case, you do not need to
press Option to enter numbers.
2
3
Press Alt
.
Press Up , Down , Right , or Left
to highlight the desired character.
Entering other symbols and accented
characters
4
Press Center
character.
to insert the
Symbols and accented characters that do
not appear on the keyboard are available by
DID YOU KNOW
?
Alternate characters are
grouped by their similarity to the base key. For
example, the alternate characters for the e key
are é, è, ë, and ê.
using the Alt
key.
33
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E
2
0
Symbols and accented characters
Enter…
Then press
Alt to
Enter…
Then press
Alt to
Enter…
Then press
Alt to
select…
á à ä â ã å æ
Á À Ä Â Ã Å Æ
ß
select…
select…
ú ù ü û
Ú Ù Ü Û
x ¤
a
n
ñ
u
A
N
Ñ
U
b or B
o
ó ò ö ô œ õ
x or X
c
ç ¢ ©
O
Ó Ò Ö Ô Œ Õ
y
Y
!
ý ÿ
C
Ç ¢ ©
p or P
r or R
s
¶
Ý Ÿ
e
é è ë ê
É È Ë Ê
í ì ï î
®
¡
E
ß š
ß Š
™
?
:
¿
i
S
:-) :-( ;-)
£ ¥ ¢
I
Í Ì Ï Î
t or T
$
l or L
£
Press Alt
characters:
by itself, after a space or at the beginning or end of a line, to select these
£ ¥ ¢ [ ] { } < > « » © ® ™ ~ ^ ø |
; _ • \ % = ° ÷
34
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E
2
Using the quick buttons
Opening applications
The front of the Treo 680 has three quick
buttons—Phone, Calendar, and
When you open an application using a
quick button or Applications View, you
automatically close the app you were
previously using.
Messaging—that open applications. The
fourth button opens Applications View (see
TIP You can customize the quick buttons
Applications
Messaging
Phone
Calendar
35
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E
2
Each of quick button opens two
applications:
Using Applications View
You can access all available applications
through Applications View.
•
To access a button’s primary application,
simply press the button.
1
Press Applications
.
Button
Primary app
Phone
TIP If prompted, press Center on the 5-way to
(Keyguard) for more info).
Calendar
Messaging
2
Use the 5-way
application you want to use.
to highlight the
•
To access a button’s secondary
application, press Option
and then
press the quick button.
Buttons
Secondary app
+
+
+
Web
Memos
Email
3
Press Center
application.
to open the selected
In Applications View, you can also do any of
the following:
DID YOU KNOW
?
Pressing Option + Menu dims
your smartphone screen.
36
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E
2
•
•
Press Applications
repeatedly to
example, if you press P, it highlights
Phone; if you then press R, it highlights
Prefs. If you pause and then press R, it
highlights the first application that starts
with R.
cycle through various categories of
applications. See Applications settings
for more info on categories.
Enter the first few letters of the
application’s name to highlight it. For
37
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O ™ 6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E
2
38
CHAPTER
3
Your phone
The Phone application is your home base for making and receiving calls
and for storing info about the people you need to stay in touch with.
You can creatively manage multiple calls, such as swapping between
calls, sending text messages to ignored calls, and creating conference
calls with up to five callers. Your Palm® Treo™ 680 smartphone helps you
perform all these tasks with ease.
And you can do more than manage your phone calls, too. You can send
text messages, open applications, go to your favorite web pages, see
your upcoming appointments, and even find out how many unread
email messages you have.
Benefits
•
Stay in touch—you choose how
•
Have fun: add wallpaper and
ringtones
•
Save time with shortcuts to your
favorite info
Y O U R P H O N E
3
1
Press and release Power/End
to wake up the screen.
Turning your Treo 680
on and off
TIP You can also press any of the quick buttons
or the Applications button to wake up your
smartphone screen.
NOTE Throughout this guide we use the
term smartphone to describe your device
and its physical aspects. We use the term
phone to describe the feature of your Treo
that lets you connect to your wireless
service provider network to make and
receive calls and transmit data.
Power/End
Center
The phone and the screen of your Treo 680
can be turned off and on separately. This
means that you can wake up the screen to
use just the organizer features of your
smartphone, without turning on the phone.
Also, when the screen is turned off, the
phone can be on and ready for you to
receive and make calls.
2
3
Press Center
to turn off Keyguard.
For more info about turning Keyguard on
and off, see Locking your keyboard
Press and release Power/End
to turn off the screen and lock the
keyboard.
Waking up the screen and turning it off
Wake up the screen and leave the phone
turned off when you want to use only the
organizer features of your Treo 680; for
example, when you’re on a plane and want
to look at your calendar.
TIP You can set how long the screen stays on.
Press Applications, select Preferences,
select Power, and then adjust the Auto-off
after setting.
41
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Turning your phone on and off
go to the Main tab of the Phone
application and you see the Signal
When your phone is on, it is connected to
your wireless service provider’s network
(provided you are in a coverage area) so
that you can make and receive phone calls
and use wireless services, such as email,
messaging, and the web browser. During
initial setup, your phone is automatically
turned on, so you can use wireless
services right away.
Strength
icon at the top of the
screen.
TIP If you’re outside a coverage area, No
Service appears in the upper-left corner and
the indicator light flashes red.
3
Press and hold Power/End
again to turn off your phone.
If you turn off your phone, you can still use
the organizer features such as Calendar
and Contacts, as well as the media
features such as Pocket Tunes and Pictures
& Videos. You might hear this referred to as
flight mode because you must turn your
phone off when you’re on a plane.
You know your phone is off when you
go to the Main tab of the Phone
application and you see Phone Off at
the top of the screen.
Opening the Phone application
Press Phone
the Phone application.
to display the Main tab in
1
2
Wake up the screen.
Press and hold Power/End
to
turn on your phone.
Status icons
TIP If the Ringer switch is in the Sound On
position, you hear a series of tones when you
turn your phone on and off (see Silencing
sounds).
Tabs
You know your phone is on and that
you’re inside a coverage area when you
42
Y O U R P H O N E
3
DID YOU KNOW You can choose which tab
?
appears when you press the Phone button.
application for details. If you change the
default tab, you need to modify the steps in
this chapter accordingly.
Making calls
4
Press Send
to make the call.
There are several ways to make a call. Try
them all to find out which way you like
best.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can paste numbers
directly into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from
another application, press Phone and select
the Dial Pad tab. Open the Edit menu and
select Paste. Press Send to dial the number.
Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Dialing using the keyboard
Select the Dial Pad
tab.
1
2
Press Phone
.
Enter the phone number by tapping the
onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus.
Press the numbered keys to enter the
phone number. (You don’t need to press
Option.)
TIP Press Backspace to delete numbers
you’ve entered. To cancel the call altogether,
press Phone to return to the Main tab in the
Phone application.
43
Y O U R P H O N E
3
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Contacts
tab.
Using the keyboard, just start entering
one of the following for the contact you
want to call:
• First name (JOH for John)
• Last name (SMI for Smith)
• First initial and last name (JSM for
John Smith)
3
Press Send
to make the call.
For example, entering SM would display
Smilla Anderson, John Smith, and
Sally Martin. Entering JSM finds only
John Smith.
TIP After you enter a phone number, you can
also press Center on the 5-way to select
whether you want to make a phone call or
send a text message to that number.
Text appears
here as you
enter it
Dialing by contact name
You need to have names and numbers in
your contact list before you can make a call
by contact name. You can add contacts
directly into your smartphone (see Adding a
contact), but the fastest way to enter lots
of contacts is to enter them in your
desktop software and then synchronize to
transfer them to your smartphone (see
You can also import contacts from your
44
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Look for the
speed-dial favorite from other types of
favorites.
icon to distinguish a
TIP To restart your search, press Backspace to
delete letters you’ve entered. Or press Phone
to return to the Main tab in the Phone
application.
TIP To view more favorite buttons, repeatedly
press Down on the 5-way.
4
5
Select the number you want to dial.
Press Send
to make the call.
TIP To see more info for a contact, highlight
the name and press Center on the 5-way to
view the address, company, and other details.
DID YOU KNOW If you want to be able to
?
search for a contact by entering a name from
the Main tab in the Phone application, you can
change a setting to do that (see Customizing
TIP You can see all the contact numbers for
the selected person or business. Highlight a
speed-dial favorite button and press Space
on the keyboard.
Dialing with a speed-dial favorite button
Your smartphone comes with a few
predefined speed-dial favorite buttons, but
you can also create your own favorites. See
4
Press Send
or Center
to
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
make the call.
Select the Favorites
tab.
Use the 5-way
to highlight the
speed-dial favorite you want.
45
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Dialing from a web page or message
Redialing a recently called number
Your Treo recognizes most phone numbers To dial the last number: Select the
that appear on web pages or in text, email, Main
tab, and then press and hold
to dial the last number you
or multimedia messages.
Send
called.
1
Select the phone number on the web
page or in the message.
To select from your most recently dialed
numbers: Select the Main tab, press
Send to open the Redial list,
highlight the number you want to call,
and then press Send
again to
make the call.
TIP If you can’t use the 5-way or stylus to
highlight and dial a phone number on a web
page or in a message, it means that your Treo
doesn’t recognize the number as a phone
number. You can still use the menus to copy
and paste the number into the Dial Pad.
To select from your call history list:
Select the Call Log tab, highlight the
number you want to call, and then press
Send to dial the number.
2
3
Press Center
to open the Dial
Number dialog box.
Select Dial to make the call.
46
Y O U R P H O N E
3
TIP See a photo of the person calling you!
DID YOU KNOW You can send a text message
?
Learn how to assign a caller ID photo in
from Contacts or your Call Log by highlighting
a number, pressing Center on the 5-way, and
then selecting Message.
To answer a call, do one of the following:
•
•
•
Press Send
.
Receiving calls
Select Answer.
Press the headset button (if the
headset is attached).
To receive calls, your phone must be on.
This is different from having only the
on and off). When your phone is off, your
calls go to voicemail.
TIP The headset button may work differently
on headsets other than the one provided with
your smartphone.
DID YOU KNOW If music is playing and a call
arrives, the music pauses automatically and
resumes when you hang up or ignore the call.
?
NOTE Pressing Phone
ringer, but it does not answer the call.
silences the
47
Y O U R P H O N E
3
To ignore a call, do one of the following:
Send the call to voicemail: Press Power/
End or select Ignore.
Using voicemail
Your wireless service may include
voicemail. Keep in mind that airtime and
other charges may apply when using
voicemail from your phone.
Send the caller a text message: Select
Ignore with Text. This option sends the
call to voicemail and opens a text message
addressed to the caller.
Setting up voicemail
NOTE Sending text messages to land line
phones may not be supported.
1
2
Press Phone
.
Press and hold 1 to dial your wireless
service provider’s automated voicemail
system.
To silence the phone while it is ringing, do
one of the following:
•
Press any key on your Treo except Send,
Power/End, or the 5-way.
TIP You can also access your wireless service
provider’s voicemail system by selecting the
Favorites tab and then selecting the
Voicemail favorite.
•
Slide the Ringer switch to the Sound
Off
position. This immediately
silences all system sounds, including
the ringer.
3
Follow the voice prompts to set up your
voicemail.
DID YOU KNOW When you silence the ringer
?
while it is ringing, you can either answer the
call or let it ring through to voicemail.
TIP If you can’t connect to your wireless
service provider’s voicemail system, contact
your wireless service provider for assistance.
48
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Voicemail notification
Listening to voicemail messages
When you have a new voicemail message,
you are notified with an Alert dialog box.
1
2
Press Phone
.
Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail
system.
TIP You can also select the Voicemail favorite
button to dial the voicemail system.
3
Enter your voicemail password using
the keyboard.
TIP Remember, you don’t need to press
Option to enter numbers, *, or # during a call.
•
•
To dismiss the Alert dialog box, select
OK.
NOTE If you defined Extra Digits for the
Voicemail favorite button (see Editing a
favorite button for details), you can select
this button to enter your password.
To play the message, select Listen.
When you have messages that you have
not listened to, a Voicemail icon also
appears in the title bar of the Phone
application. You can also select this icon to
listen to your voicemail.
49
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Use the 5-way
onscreen buttons. Here’s what the buttons
do:
or stylus to select the
What can I do when
I’m on a call?
0
Turns on the speakerphone, which
When you make or receive a call, Active
Call View appears.
means that you and everybody
around you can hear the call. (Of
course, the caller can hear you as
well.) The advantage is that you
can check your calendar, look up
contact info, take notes, and use
other features during a call. This
button is not available when you
use a headset.
TIP If the screen dims during a call, press any
key except Send or Power/End to restore the
screen brightness.
DID YOU KNOW You can set how long the
?
screen stays at full brightness during phone
details.
Turns off the speakerphone when it
is on.
Caller’s name
and number
Replaces the Speakerphone button
when you use a Bluetooth
hands-free device. Select this
button to stop using the hands-free
device and switch to holding your
smartphone to your ear.
®
Call duration
Call status
Puts a call on hold, and the call
status changes to On Hold. To take
the call off hold, select this button
again.
Button label
50
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Lets you make another call while
the first call is on hold; see Making
a second call for details. For info on
handling a second incoming call,
DID YOU KNOW
?
Do you accidentally press
onscreen buttons when you’re on a call? You
can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive
feature during phone calls, see Locking your
Ending a call
Opens the Dial Pad so you can use
it to dial additional numbers, such
as an extension or a response to a
voice prompt.
Do one of the following:
•
•
Press Power/End
.
Press the button on the headset (if the
headset is attached).
Dials any extra digits (such as a
password or an extension) that you
assigned to a speed-dial favorite
button. See Defining favorite
buttons for information on defining
extra digits. This button disappears
after you select it to dial the
numbers.
Switching applications during a call
You can use your organizer apps and other
applications while you’re talking on the
phone; so go ahead and check your
calendar, or go to Memos and enter the
driving directions your caller is giving you.
You can even send text messages while
you’re on a call.
Mutes the microphone so that you
and the noise around you can’t be
heard on the other end. The call
status changes to Muted. When
you want to speak, be sure to
select the Mute button again.
NOTE What you can’t do, however, is
make a data connection while on a call.
This means that you can’t browse the web
or send or receive email or multimedia
messages.
51
Y O U R P H O N E
3
1
(Optional) If you want to continue
talking while viewing another
application, select Speakerphone or
connect a headset (see Using a
2
3
Press Applications
.
Select the icon for the application you
want to open.
4
When you’re ready to leave the app,
open another app or press Phone
to return to Active Call View.
TIP You can turn the Add New Number prompt
on and off. In Contacts, open the Options
menu, and select Preferences. To turn this
option on, check the Ask to add unknown
phone numbers after calls box. To turn this
option off, uncheck this box.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can press Phone to toggle
between Active Call View and the Main tab in
the Phone app, so you can access other tabs,
such as Contacts and Favorites, during a call.
•
•
To create a new contact entry for this
number, select Create a New Contact,
and enter the contact’s info.
Saving phone numbers
After you complete a call to a number that
is not in your Contacts list, you are
prompted to add the number to your
Contacts list.
To add this number to an existing
contact entry, select Add to a Contact,
and then select the contact. This pastes
the number into the first available phone
number field for that contact.
•
To decline adding this number, select
Cancel.
52
Y O U R P H O N E
3
•
To disable the Add New Number
prompt, check the Don’t ask me this
again box, and then select Cancel.
NOTE To do this, you can use any of the
5
6
When the Dial another call prompt
appears, select Yes .
If you don’t add a number right away, follow
these steps to add it later.
Select Swap
to switch between
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press Phone
Select the Call Log
Highlight the number you want to save.
Press Menu
.
the two calls.
tab.
.
Select Add Contact.
Select New to create a new contact, or
select Add to add this number to an
existing contact.
7
Enter the information for the entry, and
then select Done.
7
To end the active call, press Power/End
.
Making a second call
You can make a second call while your first
call is still active.
DID YOU KNOW
?
When you hang up one call,
you can continue your conversation with the
remaining call.
1
Dial the first number and wait until the
person answers.
Receiving a second call (call waiting)
2
Put the first call on hold by pressing
When you are on a call, you can receive a
second call and have separate
conversations with each caller. When the
second call comes in, you hear a call
Send
Select Add Call
Dial the second number.
or selecting Hold
.
3
4
.
53
Y O U R P H O N E
3
waiting tone and the Call Waiting dialog
box appears. You can do any of the
following to handle the second call:
in your mobile account may be deducted
for each call included in the conference call.
1
While the first call is active, make a
second call.
•
To place the current call on hold and
answer the new call, press Send
or select Answer.
2
Select Conference
. This joins you
and the two calls in a conference call.
•
•
To send the new call to voicemail, select
Ignore.
To send the new call to voicemail and
send the caller a text message, select
Ignore with Text.
NOTE Sending text messages to land line
phones may not be supported.
•
•
To hang up the current call and answer
the new call, press Power/End
.
3
4
To add more calls to the conference,
select Hold , dial another number,
To switch between the original call and
the second call you answered, select
and then select Conference
to add
the new call.
Swap
or press Send
.
To end the conference, make sure the
conference is the active call, and then
Making a conference call
You can join a total of five other calls in a
press Power/End
.
conference call, provided that your network
and service plan include 6-way
conferencing. Please contact your wireless
service provider for more information.
Additional charges may apply and minutes
54
Y O U R P H O N E
3
4
Select the Forward all calls pick list.
TIP If you want to continue a conversation
with one of the people on a conference call,
you can extract that call from the conference.
Select Extract Call (the onscreen button on
the far right), and then select the call you want
to extract.
• If the forwarding number appears in
the pick list, select the number.
• If the forwarding number does not
appear in the pick list, select Edit
Numbers, and then select New.
Enter a forwarding number, including
the area code and country code if
they are different from your mobile
phone number. Select OK. Select the
number you just entered, and then
select OK.
Forwarding all calls
You can forward all your calls to another
telephone number. You can also selectively
forward certain calls (see Forwarding calls
under certain conditions). Please check
with your wireless service provider about
availability and pricing of forwarded calls,
as additional charges may apply.
5
Select OK.
TIP After you set the number you want to
forward all your calls to, the call forwarding
icon appears in the title bar (see What are all
those icons?). We also recommend that you
call your Treo 680 to confirm that your call
forwarding settings work properly.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Call
Preferences.
TIP To turn off forwarding for all calls, select
Off from the Forward all calls pick list.
Forwarding calls under certain conditions
You can forward calls to another number
when the line is busy, a call is unanswered,
your smartphone is off, or you are outside a
coverage area.
55
Y O U R P H O N E
3
1
2
3
Press Phone
Press Menu
.
How many minutes
have I used?
.
Select Options, and then select Call
Preferences.
4
5
Select the Forward all calls pick list and
select Off.
1
2
3
4
Press Phone
Select the Call Log
Press Menu
.
tab.
Select any of the following pick lists:
.
When busy: Forwards calls if the phone
is busy.
Select Totals from the Record menu.
Not answered: Forwards calls if you do
not answer.
Off/No service: Forwards calls when
your smartphone is not connected to a
mobile network.
6
7
If the forwarding number appears in the
pick list, select the number. If the
forwarding number does not appear in
the pick list, select Edit Numbers and
then select New. Enter a forwarding
number, and select OK. Select the
number you just entered.
5
6
(Optional) To reset the counters to zero,
select Reset Counters.
Select Done.
Select OK, and then select OK again.
56
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Entering names and
phone numbers
Contacts is where you enter information
about the people you want to stay in
contact with. You can get to this info from
the Phone application, to dial phone
numbers and create favorites, and from the
Messaging and email applications, to send
messages. When you create a contact, you
can also assign a photo and ringtone ID to
that contact, so you know when they call
you.
DID YOU KNOW
?
If you add a symbol at the
beginning of a contact’s last name, such as
#Smith, the contact appears at the top of your
contact list.
6
Do any of the following:
Adding a contact
Add a caller ID photo: Select the
Picture box. (See Assigning a caller ID
photo for more info.)
1
2
3
4
Press Phone
Select the Contacts
Press Menu
.
tab.
.
Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the
caller ID ringtone for more info.)
Select New Contact from the Record
menu.
5
Use the 5-way
fields as you enter info.
to move between
Place the entry in a category and
mark it private: Select Details. (See
Working with private entries for more
info.)
57
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Add a note to an entry: Select Note
TIP To edit the entries on your SIM card you
must either Import them into Contacts or
press Applications, select SIM Book, and
edit them in the phone book on your SIM card.
.
Display additional fields for this
contact: Select Plus
.
7
After you enter all the information,
select Done.
5
6
Select Edit.
Make changes to the entry as
necessary, and then select Done.
TIP Import contacts from your SIM card
quickly and easily. In the Contacts list, open
the Record menu and select Import from
SIM.
Assigning a caller ID photo
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Contacts
tab.
Viewing or changing contact information
Open the contact you want to add the
photo to (see Viewing or changing
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Contacts
tab.
Begin entering one of the following for
the contact you want to view or edit:
4
5
Select Edit.
Select the Picture box and do one of
the following:
• First name (JOH for John)
• Last name (SMI for Smith)
• Select Camera to take a photo and
add it to this contact entry when you
save the photo.
• First initial and last name (JSM for
John Smith)
4
Select the name of the entry you want
to open.
• Select Photos and select an existing
photo that you want to assign to this
contact.
58
Y O U R P H O N E
3
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Contacts
tab.
Open the contact to whom you want to
give a caller ID ringtone (see Viewing or
4
5
Select Edit.
Select the Ringtone pick list and select
a tone for this contact entry.
6
Select Done.
DID YOU KNOW If you assign pictures to your
?
contacts in Microsoft Outlook or
Palm Desktop software and you install the
desktop software from the Palm Software
Installation CD, the pictures are automatically
added to your contact entries on your
smartphone when you sync. If you use
third-party synchronization software, picture
sync may not be supported. Check with the
software developer for information.
6
Select OK.
TIP You can assign a ringtone to an entire
category of contacts. For example, use a
special ringtone for categories such as Family,
Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category
pick list in the upper-left corner and select Edit
Categories. Select the category, and then
select Edit. Select the ringtone on the Edit
Category screen.
Assigning a caller ID ringtone
Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is
calling before you even look at your
smartphone. This is a great way to identify
calls from important people in your life and
to screen calls that you’d prefer not to
answer.
59
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Customizing Contacts
Deleting a contact
1
2
3
4
Press Phone
Select the Contacts
Press Menu
.
1
2
3
Open the contact you want to delete.
Press Menu
tab.
.
.
Select Delete Contact from the Record
menu, and then select OK.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
Creating a business card for beaming
5
Set any of the following options:
1
Create a new contact and enter your
own business card info.
Remember Last Category: Sets
whether Contacts opens to the last
category you selected.
2
Open the contact entry containing your
business card info.
Show SIM Phonebook: Sets whether
SIM Phonebook appears as an option in
the category pick list. When you check
this box, you can view entries in the
phone book on your SIM card.
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Select Business Card from the
Record menu.
TIP After you create your business card, you
can beam it to another device with an IR
port—provided the device supports beaming
with Palm OS® devices. Go to Contacts or the
Main tab in the Phone application, open the
Record menu, and then select Beam
Business Card.
Ask to add unknown phone numbers
after calls: Sets whether you are
prompted to add phone numbers that
are not in your Contacts list after a call.
You can add unknown numbers to an
existing contact or create a new contact
entry.
List By: Sets whether the Contacts list
is sorted by last name or company
name.
60
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Viewing your SIM Phonebook
Defining favorite
buttons
1
2
3
4
Press Phone
Select the Contacts
Press Menu
.
tab.
.
Your Treo provides an unlimited number of
favorite buttons for quick access to the
following common tasks:
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
5
Make sure the Show SIM Phonebook
box is checked.
•
•
•
•
Dialing a phone number (speed-dial)
Opening an application
6
7
Select OK.
In the Contacts list, select the category
pick list at the top of the screen and
select SIM Phonebook.
Accessing a web page
Addressing a message (text, MMS, or
email)
•
Accessing voicemail (preset on your
Treo)
TIP If you imported contacts from your SIM
card to Contacts, you may want to uncheck
the Show SIM Phonebook box to avoid
seeing duplicate entries.
TIP Your wireless service provider may preset
favorite buttons on your smartphone that are
customized for their services.
TIP Need to copy a contact to your phone
book on your SIM card? In Contacts, select
the contact you want to copy, open the
Record menu, and then select Export to
SIM.
61
Y O U R P H O N E
3
5
Enter a label for the favorite:
• If the entry is for an existing contact,
select Lookup. Start entering the last
name of the contact, and select the
contact when it appears in the lookup
list.
• If the entry is for a new contact, enter
the label, press Down , and enter
the number.
DID YOU KNOW
?
If you’re upgrading from a Treo
600/650, most of your favorites should
transfer from your old Treo along with your
other info. However, you may need to
rearrange the order in which your favorites
appear by opening the Record menu and then
selecting Organize Favorites. For more info
about upgrading, see Upgrading from another
6
(Optional) Enter a Quick Key.
Creating a speed-dial favorite button
1
2
3
4
Press Phone
Select the Favorites
Press Menu
.
KEY TERM Quick Key A letter that you can
press and hold to activate a favorite from any
tab in the Phone app. For example, create a
speed-dial button for your mother’s number
and enter the letter M for “Mom” as the
Quick Key. Then when you want to call her, go
to the Phone app and press and hold M. Your
smartphone dials the number.
tab.
.
Select New Favorite on the Record
menu.
62
Y O U R P H O N E
3
7
(Optional) Select More, and then select
advanced options:
1
2
3
4
Press Phone
Select the Favorites
Press Menu
.
tab.
Extra Digits: Defines additional digits to
dial, such as a password or extension.
To enter a one-second pause, insert a ,
(comma) between digits. To add a
longer pause, either enter more
commas, or enter a p to add a 3-second
pause.
.
Select New Favorite on the Record
menu.
5
6
Select the Type pick list and select
Application, Message, Email, or Web
Link.
Enter a label for the favorite and enter
any other necessary information on
the screen.
Dial Extra Digits Automatically: Dials
predefined extra digits immediately
after dialing the phone number, when
checked.
7
8
(Optional) Enter a Quick Key.
Select OK.
8
Select OK.
Editing a favorite button
DID YOU KNOW You can assign a special
ringtone for a contact. See Assigning a caller
ID ringtone for details.
?
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Favorites
tab.
Highlight the favorite button you want to
edit.
Creating other types of favorite buttons
4
5
Press Menu
.
DID YOU KNOW When creating a Message or
?
Select Edit Favorite on the Record
menu.
Email favorite, you can enter multiple
addresses; simply separate each address with
a comma. This is an easy way to send
messages to a group of people.
6
After you make your changes, select
OK.
63
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Using a hands-free
device
TIP To arrange your favorites, open the Record
menu and select Organize Favorites.
Highlight the favorite you want to move, and
then press and hold Option + Up or Down to
move the button to another position. Select
Done.
If you need to use your phone while driving
and this is safe and permitted in your area,
use a phone headset (wired headset
included) or car kit (sold separately) for
hands-free operation. Using a hands-free
device also makes it easy to check your
calendar, look up contact info, take notes,
and use other features during a call.
Deleting a favorite button
TIP Some favorites, such as voicemail, cannot
be deleted. If a favorite can’t be deleted, the
Delete button does not appear on the screen.
In addition to the headset included with
your Treo, your Treo is compatible with the
following types of hands-free devices that
are sold separately:
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Favorites
tab.
Highlight the favorite button you want to
delete.
•
Wired headsets and car kits with a
2.5mm connector (3-pin or 4-pin)
4
5
Press Menu
.
Select Edit Favorite on the Record
menu.
•
Wireless headsets and car kits enabled
with Bluetooth 1.1 or 1.2 wireless
technology
6
7
Select Delete.
Select OK.
TIP The headset designed for Treo 180/270/
300 is not compatible with your Treo 680.
Check the specifications for your
hands-free device to confirm compatibility.
64
Y O U R P H O N E
3
When in doubt, ask the manufacturer if the
product is compatible with your Treo 680.
To view a list of compatible Bluetooth
hands-free devices, go to www.palm.com/
•
•
Swap between two calls (one on hold
and one active)
Hang up the active call
TIP On other headsets, the headset button
may work differently than the button on the
headset included with your Treo 680.
NOTE You cannot use a hands-free device
with Bluetooth wireless technology to
listen to music files.
Microphone
Headset
button
purchase the Palm 2-in-1 Stereo Headset. If
3.5mm connector, then you need to purchase
Speaker
Using a wired headset
When using the headset that is included
with your smartphone, you can press the
headset button to perform any of the
following tasks:
•
•
•
Answer an incoming call
Answer a call-waiting call
Resume a call that you put on hold (not
available when multiple calls are in
progress)
65
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free
device
from another Bluetooth device. See the
documentation that came with your
hands-free device for instructions.
KEY TERM Partnership Two devices—for
example, your smartphone and a hands-free
device—that can connect because each
device finds the same passkey on the other
device. Once you form a partnership with a
device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to
connect with that device again. Partnership is
also known as paired relationship, pairing,
trusted device, and trusted pair.
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth
icon in the title bar.
and select
2
Select Bluetooth On.
NOTE The Bluetooth icon changes from
gray to blue to let you know that Bluetooth
technology is turned on.
Once you set up a partnership with a
Bluetooth hands-free device, you can
communicate with that device whenever it
is turned on and within range. Bluetooth
range is up to 30 feet in optimum
environmental conditions. Performance
and range may be reduced by physical
obstacles, radio interference from nearby
electronic equipment, and other factors.
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your Treo 680 when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
TIP If you hear a headset buzz or experience
poor microphone performance, your headset
may be incompatible with your Treo 680.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to recreate any
partnerships you already created.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Prepare your
hands-free device to accept a connection
66
Y O U R P H O N E
3
4
5
Select Setup Devices.
the more difficult it is for the passkey to be
deciphered.
Select Hands-free Setup.
7
After you finish setting up the device,
select Done to return to Trusted
Devices View.
NOTE For some car kits, you need to
initiate a Bluetooth connection from your
smartphone to complete the partnership
process. To do this, highlight the car kit in
Trusted Devices View, press Menu
,
and then select Connect.
6
Follow the onscreen instructions to
create a partnership with the specific
hands-free device. When prompted,
enter a passkey.
8
(Optional) Enable advanced hands-free
features by pressing the multifunction
button (MFB) on the hands-free device.
IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices
have a predefined passkey; if so, you can
find the passkey in the documentation for
that device. Other devices provide a screen
where you enter a passkey that you make
up. In either case, you must use the same
passkey on both your smartphone and your
hands-free device. We recommend that
where possible, you make up a passkey of
16 alphanumeric characters (letters and
numerals only) to improve the security of
your smartphone. The longer the passkey,
You can tell the connection is successful
when you see a light blue headset icon in
the title bar of the Phone application. You
can now use your Treo 680 with the
Bluetooth hands-free device.
Using a Bluetooth hands-free device
After you create a partnership with your
Bluetooth hands-free device and you turn it
on within range (up to 30 feet), the Treo
automatically routes all calls to the
hands-free device instead of to the
67
Y O U R P H O N E
3
earpiece on your Treo. When a call comes
•
Place a call on hold and answer a
call-waiting call
in, your smartphone rings and the
hands-free device beeps. Even if you
answer the call on your Treo, the call goes
to the hands-free device. If you prefer to
route calls to the earpiece on your Treo,
you can change the settings on your
smartphone to do this; see Customizing
device for details.
•
•
Hang up a single call
Transfer an outgoing call from the
earpiece on your Treo to the hands-free
device
•
•
Ignore an incoming call
Redial the last number you called from
the hands-free device
DID YOU KNOW
?
If you have more than one
TIP If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free
device and you want to return to the earpiece
or a wired headset during a call, select Cancel
Bluetooth in Active Call View. To return the
call to the hands-free device, open the
Options menu and select Connect
Bluetooth.
Bluetooth hands-free device, the last one you
connected to becomes the active device. To
switch between devices, turn off the active
device before you try to connect to the other
device.
Customizing advanced settings for your
hands-free device
The features of your hands-free device vary
by model. Check the documentation for
your hands-free device for details about
these features. Your Treo 680 can support
the following actions, provided that your
hands-free device also supports them:
You can set whether your hands-free
device automatically answer calls, provided
the device supports this feature.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Hands-free.
and select
.
•
•
Answer an incoming call
2
Hang up a call and answer a call-waiting
call
68
Y O U R P H O N E
3
3
Do one of the following:
Customizing phone
To send all calls to your hands-free
device: Check the Always route calls
to handsfree box. Select the Auto
answer pick list and select whether you
want your hands-free device to
settings
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can download any
automatically answer incoming calls and
how quickly it answers.
compatible ringtone directly to your
smartphone (see Downloading files from a
to your computer and then email them to your
smartphone.
To choose between the earpiece on
your Treo and your hands-free device
on a call-by-call basis: Uncheck the
Always route calls to handsfree box.
When the phone rings, you can answer
the call with your hands-free device by
pressing the multifunction button on
your hands-free device, or you can
answer the call with the earpiece on
your Treo by using the controls on your
Selecting ringtones
You can set various tones for various types
of incoming calls.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
4
Select Done.
4
Select the Application pick list and
select Ring Tones.
69
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Roaming: A special tone for incoming
calls when you’re outside your home
mobile network. This tone overrides all
other ringtones, unless you select No
Sound.
9
Select Done.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can assign a ringtone to a
contact or an entire category of contacts.
5
6
Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
Creating and managing ringtones
Select the Vibrate pick list and select
when you want your smartphone to
vibrate for an incoming call.
You can also record sounds and use them
as ringtones.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
7
8
(Optional) Check the Escalate ring
tone volume box if you want the ring to
play softly and then increase to full
volume the longer it rings.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
4
5
Select Manage.
Select a ringtone from the pick list to
identify each of the following:
Do one of the following:
Known Caller: An incoming call from
someone in your Contacts or Favorites.
• To record a sound, select New.
• To play a sound, select it with the
5-way
• To delete a sound, highlight it and
press Backspace
.
Unknown Caller: An incoming call from
someone identified by caller ID who is
not in your Contacts or Favorites. This
includes callers that have blocked their
caller ID.
.
• To send a sound, highlight it and
select Send.
70
Y O U R P H O N E
3
6
Select Done twice.
6
7
Select the Vibrate pick list and select
when you want your smartphone to
vibrate for a phone alert.
TIP You can also create a new sound by
selecting New in Sound & Alerts Preferences.
Select an alert tone from the pick list for
each of the following:
Selecting Phone alert tones
Voicemail Alert: Plays when you have
new voicemail.
You can set various tones for various types
of alerts.
Coverage in/out: Plays when you move
into or out of a coverage area.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
8
Select Done.
Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
Adjusting call volume
4
Select the Application pick list and
select Phone Alerts.
While a call is in progress, press the
Volume button on the side of your Treo to
adjust the call volume.
•
To increase the volume, press the upper
half of the Volume button.
•
To decrease the volume, press the
lower half of the Volume button.
5
Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
71
Y O U R P H O N E
3
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Call
Barring.
4
Select the Outgoing and Incoming pick
lists, and then select the type of calls
you want to prevent.
Volume
Side button
5
Select OK.
Customizing the Main tab in the Phone
application
Adjusting ringer volume
When a call is not in progress and music is
not playing, press the Volume button on
the side of your Treo to adjust ringer
volume, and then press the Side button to
confirm your selection.
Phone Display Options let you customize
the appearance and entry mode of the
Main tab in the Phone application.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Barring calls
Select Options, and then select Phone
Call Barring lets you prevent unauthorized
calls on your smartphone. You must enter
your Call Barring password every time you
change your Call Barring preferences.
Contact your wireless service provider if
you do not know this password or if you
need more information.
Display Options.
4
Set any of the following options:
Wallpaper: Sets the wallpaper that
appears on the Main tab in the Phone
application. To change the wallpaper,
select the thumbnail image and then
select an image to use as wallpaper.
TIP Call barring may not be available in some
areas.
72
Y O U R P H O N E
3
DID YOU KNOW You can also set the
?
background for Calendar Agenda View. See
for details.
Fade: Adjusts the intensity level of the
wallpaper image.
Typing…: Sets whether typing in the
Main tab in the Phone app displays the
Dial Pad and enters numbers you want
to dial, or whether it displays the
Contacts tab and starts a contacts
search.
5
Select OK.
Setting your dialing preferences
Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix
to your phone numbers. For example, you
can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit
phone numbers. You can add a different
prefix based on the length of the phone
number.
TIP If you select the Typing starts contacts
search option, you can still enter a phone
number from the Main tab in the Phone app
by pressing Option followed by the number.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Show Calendar event: Sets whether
the current event from the Calendar
application appears in the Main tab in
the Phone app. When this option is
enabled, you can then select this event
to jump to the Calendar app.
Select Options, and then select Dial
Preferences.
4
Set any of the following options:
Dialing from North America: Formats
phone numbers using North American
conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).
Default View: Sets the tab that appears
when you press Phone
.
73
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Always dial +1 in front of the area
Manually selecting the wireless network
code: Adds a 1 in front of 10-digit phone
numbers. This option is available only
when Dialing from North America is
enabled.
You may be able to search for other
wireless network services in your current
location.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to
7-digit numbers. For example, enter
your own area code to automatically add
your area code when you dial local
numbers.
Press Menu
.
Select Select Network from the
Options menu.
4
Select another network, if available.
To (6), (5), (4), digit numbers: Adds a
prefix to numbers with the specified
number of digits. For example, if all the
phone numbers in your office have the
408 area code and a 555 exchange,
followed by a 4-digit extension, select 4
and enter the prefix 408555. To call a
colleague, simply dial your colleague’s
4-digit extension; your smartphone
automatically dials the rest and makes
the call. You can also create contact
entries with just the extension number
and then dial the number from your
Contacts list.
5
Select OK.
Using TTY
A TTY (also known as TDD or text
telephone) is a telecommunications device
that allows people who are deaf or hard of
hearing, or who have speech or language
disabilities, to communicate by telephone.
5
Select OK.
74
Y O U R P H O N E
3
Your Treo 680 is compatible with select
TTY devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD
machine to your smartphone through the
headset jack, but you cannot use your
headset jack with a headset while this
mode is enabled. Please check with the
manufacturer of your TTY device for
connectivity information and to ensure that
the TTY device supports digital wireless
transmission.
What are all those
icons?
You can monitor the status of several items
using icons in the title bar in the Phone
application:
To use TTY, you may need to make
additional arrangements with your wireless
service provider. Please contact your
wireless service provider’s customer
service department for more information.
1
2
3
4
5
Press Phone
.
Select the Dial Pad
Enter #*TTY.
tab.
Press Send
.
When a message appears indicating
that TTY is enabled, select OK. To
disable TTY, repeat these steps.
TIP A red T appears at the top of the Phone
screen to indicate that TTY is enabled.
75
Y O U R P H O N E
3
0
You have new voicemail
Your phone is on and you are in
your wireless service provider’s
coverage area. If you are outside
a coverage area, No Service or
No Service—SOS Only appears
instead. No Service means that
there is no coverage at all and
No Service—SOS Only means
that you can call only
messages. You can select this
icon to retrieve your messages.
If you have alternate line service
(ALS), the left side is shaded
when you have voicemail on
line 1, and the right side is
shaded when you have
voicemail on line 2.
emergency numbers, such as
112. When you turn off your
phone, Phone Off appears.
You have a new alert, such as a
Calendar alarm or a new text
message. To view the alert,
press and hold Center
select the icon. See Viewing
or
Call forwarding is active.
Your phone is on. The bars
display the signal strength. The
stronger the signal, the more
bars that appear. If you are
outside a coverage area, no bars
appear.
The Bluetooth wireless
technology icon appears in gray
when this feature is off, in blue
when this feature is on, and in
reverse blue when your
smartphone is communicating
with another Bluetooth device.
Your phone is on and a GPRS or
EDGE network is within range,
but you are not actively
transmitting data. You can still
make and receive calls.
Your phone is on and a GPRS or
EDGE data connection is active.
76
Y O U R P H O N E
3
This icon replaces the Bluetooth
icon when your smartphone is
connected to a Bluetooth
Your battery is fully charged and
your smartphone is not
connected to the charger.
hands-free device. This icon
appears in dark blue when a call
is in progress and in light blue
when a call is not in progress.
You have new text or
multimedia messages. The
number next to the icon
indicates the number of unread
messages in your Inbox. You
can select this icon to retrieve
your messages.
This icon replaces the Bluetooth
icon when your smartphone is
connected to your computer
using a dial-up networking
(DUN) connection.
You have new email messages.
The number next to the icon
indicates the number of unread
messages in your Inbox. If you
set up multiple email accounts
on your smartphone, this
Your battery is partially drained.
When the battery drains to 20%
of its capacity, the icon changes
from blue to red. At 10% of its
capacity, you begin to receive
warning messages, and at 5%
of its capacity, the smartphone
beeps (if the Ringer switch is in
the Sound On position) and the
icon changes from red to clear.
number reflects only the
account that you most recently
accessed. You can select this
icon to retrieve your messages.
Your battery is being charged.
The lightning bolt turns from red
to green when the battery is
fully charged and your
smartphone remains connected
to the charger.
77
Y O U R P H O N E
3
KEY TERM GPRS (General Packet Radio
Service) A mobile connectivity technology
that provides persistent data connections.
(Additional charges may apply.)
KEY TERM EDGE (Enhanced Data rate for GSM
Evolution) An enhanced version of GPRS
that delivers data speeds that are up to three
times faster than standard GPRS connections.
(Additional charges may apply.)
DID YOU KNOW You can tap the Bluetooth
?
icon to quickly turn Bluetooth wireless
features on and off.
TIP To display the remaining battery power,
tap the battery icon at the top of the screen.
78
CHAPTER
4
Your email and other
messages
You already know how efficient email and messaging are for
staying in touch. Now your Palm® Treo™ 680 smartphone brings
you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy the
ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and
colleagues anywhere you can access your wireless service
provider’s data network.
You can send photos to your friends and family, or create
Microsoft Word or Excel files and send them to your
colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit
at your convenience.
Benefits
•
Access email on the go
•
Save messages from your
computer to view at a convenient
time
•
Send and receive photos, sound
files, Word and Excel files, and
more
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Which email
application should I
use?
Your Treo 680 includes the VersaMail®
application (called Email in Applications
View), which you can use to access your
corporate, personal, and fee-based Internet
email. You can also access web-based
email, like Yahoo! Mail or Hotmail, from the
web browser on your Treo.
The VersaMail
application
Before you can use VersaMail, you need to
enter your email account settings. If you
have multiple email accounts, you must
enter settings for each email account.
After you enter your email account
settings, see the User Guide for the
VersaMail Application on your computer for
info on sending and receiving messages
and customizing your VersaMail settings.
Windows: Start>Programs>Palm
TIP An email application is not an email
provider. An email application just transfers
messages from an account that you have
already set up with a provider.
Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD and
click the link to the User Guide for the
VersaMail Application in the
KEY TERM Email provider The service you
use to send and receive email. Your email
provider’s name appears between the @
symbol and the dot in your email address.
Documentation folder.
How do I get started?
1
If either of the following is true, read the
User Guide for the VersaMail
NOTE You must activate data services on
your your wireless service provider account
before you can use email on your
smartphone.
Application on your computer:
• You used the VersaMail application on
your previous Palm OS® device, and
81
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
you want to transfer those settings to
your smartphone.
Germany: debitel E-Mail, E-Plus imail,
Freenet Email-Office, GMX eMail,
T-online eMail, Vodafone eMail, and
Web.de E-Mail.
• You plan to use VersaMail to access
an email account on a Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync server, a Lotus
Notes server, or a Microsoft MAPI
server.
Hong Kong: 1O1O, 3-DUALBAND-,
Netvigator (IMS), and One2Free.
Ireland: o2 Ireland and Vodafone
Ireland.
2
If your email provider is listed in the
following table, then skip to Setting up
Italy: interfree, kataweb, libero, Tim,
tin.It, and Tiscali.
Australia: Bigpond Mail and OptusNet.
Malaysia: Jaring and Maxis Net.
Belgium: Scarlet, Skynet, Swing, and
Tiscali Belgium.
Mexico: Mensaje Telcel and yahoo!.
Netherlands: @Home, Chello, Het Net,
Planet Internet, Tiscali, Wanadoo,
XS4ALL, and Zonnet.
Brazil: UOL.
Canada: Rogers High Speed and
Sympatico.
New Zealand: Vodafone NZ.
Denmark: Cybercity, Sonofon, TDC, and
Tiscali.
Norway: Telenor and Netcom.
Philippines: GlobeQuest and Pacific
Internet - PH.
Finland: TeliaSonera.
France: 9 Telecom, Cegetel,
Singapore: Pacific Internet, Singnet,
and StarHub.
Club-Internet, Free, Freesurf, La Poste,
Noos, Orange, SFR.net, Tele2, Tiscali,
Wanadoo, and yahoo!.
Spain: Movistar, Telefonica, Terra.es,
Vodafone, and Wanadoo.
82
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Sweden: Bredbandsbolaget, Chello,
Com Hem, Tele2, TeliaSonera Mail,
Vodafone Euromail, and yahoo!.
• Mail protocol: POP or IMAP
Switzerland: Bluewin, GMX, green.ch,
Orange, Sunrise (my), Sunrise Freesurf,
SwissOnline, Tiscali, and yahoo!.
• Incoming and outgoing mail server
names, such as mail.myisp.com
• Incoming and outgoing mail server
port numbers, such as 110 (incoming
POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25
(outgoing POP or IMAP)
Taiwan: HiNet Umail.
Thailand: AIS Mail.
United Kingdom: Blueyonder, BT
Internet, BT Openworld, BT Yahoo!,
Clara.net, Demon, Freeserve, Lycos,
NTL, O2, Orange, Pipex, Tiscali, UK
• (If necessary) Security settings: APOP,
ESMTP, SSL
Setting up VersaMail to work with
Online, Virgin, Vodafone, Wanadoo, and common providers
yahoo!.
1
Press Applications
and select
Email
application.
to open the VersaMail
United States: AOL, Apple.Mac, AT&T
Worldnet, Bell South, Cablevision,
Charter, Comcast, CompuServe,
EarthLink, Gmail, Mail.com, NetZero,
Speakeasy, Verizon DSL, and Yahoo!.
2
3
If prompted to select an initial setup
option, select Continue.
Make up a name that describes this
account and enter it in the Account
Name field. For example, Work Email.
3
If your email provider’s name is not
listed, then you need to obtain the
following info from your system
administrator or ISP, and then skip to
4
Select the Mail Service pick list, and
then select your email provider, such as
EarthLink, and then select Next.
83
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Setting up VersaMail to work with other
providers
1
Press Applications
and select
Email
to open the VersaMail
application.
2
3
If prompted to select an initial setup
option, then select Continue.
Make up a name that describes this
account and enter it in the Account
Name field. For example, Work Email.
5
Enter the username for your email
account. Your username usually appears
before the @ symbol in your email
address.
4
5
Select the Mail Service pick list, and
then select Other.
Select the Protocol pick list, select POP
or IMAP (based on the info you got from
your system administrator or ISP), and
then select Next.
NOTE For some email providers, such as
Gmail, your username is your entire email
address. Check with your email provider if
you are not sure what to enter as your
username.
6
Select the Password box, enter your
email account password, select OK, and
then select Next.
7
Select Next, and then select Done.
TIP To enter settings for another email
account, open the Accounts menu and select
Account Setup.
84
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
6
Enter the username for your email
account. Your username usually appears
before the @ symbol in your email
address.
Creating and sending messages
1
2
From the Inbox, select New.
Begin entering one of the following for
the addressee:
NOTE For some email providers, such as
Gmail, your username is your entire email
address. Check with your email provider if
you are not sure what to enter as your
username.
• Email address
• First name
• Last name
TIP If you enter address info that matches one
or more of your contacts, VersaMail displays
the matching contacts. To accept a
suggestion, select the correct contact. To
send to a different address, keep entering the
email address or name.
7
8
9
Select the Password box, enter your
email account password, select OK, and
then select Next.
Enter your email address and the
names of the incoming and outgoing
mail servers, and then select Next.
3
4
Enter the subject and message text.
If your system administrator or ISP
provided port numbers or security
settings, select Advanced, and then
enter those settings.
TIP To move between fields, press Up or
Down on the 5-way.
Select one of the following:
TIP You can also select Advanced to set more
options for incoming and outgoing messages.
Send: Connects and sends all
messages immediately. If the message
cannot be sent for any reason, the
message is stored in your Outbox.
10 Select Done.
Outbox: Puts the message in the
Outbox to send later.
85
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Drafts: Saves the message so you can
Attaching photos and videos
continue working on it at another time.
1
Create the message to which you want
to attach the photo or video.
2
On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3
From the Type pick list, select Photo/
Video.
DID YOU KNOW VersaMail makes up to five
?
attempts to send a message; if it is still not
successful, an alert message appears and you
must try to manually send the message again.
Adding attachments to your messages
4
On the Select Media screen, select the
Album pick list to go to the album
containing the photo or video you want,
and then check the box to the left of the
photo or video.
You can attach several types of files to your
email messages.
.
TIP To remove an attachment, select the file in
the Attachments box, and then select
Delete.
5
Select Done.
.
TIP To attach more than one file to a message,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
86
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Attaching ringtones
3
4
5
From the Type pick list, select
Documents.
1
Create the message to which you want
to attach the ringtone.
Select the file you want on the
Documents screen.
2
On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
Select Done.
upper-right corner.
Attaching other types of files
3
From the Type pick list, select Sounds.
1
Create the message to which you want
to attach the item.
TIP Ringtones that are copy-protected appear
in the Sounds application with a lock icon. You
can use these ringtones on your phone, but
you cannot send them as attachments.
2
On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3
From the Type pick list, select the type
of file to attach—for example, Address,
Appointment, or Memo/Text.
4
5
Select the ringtone you want, and then
select Insert.
Select Done.
4
5
Select the item you want from the list in
the Type box.
Attaching Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and
PDF files
Select Done.
1
Create the message to which you want
to attach the file.
Receiving and viewing messages
1
From any mailbox, select Get or Get &
2
On the New Message screen, select
Send.
the red paper clip
icon in the
2
From the Inbox, select the message you
want to view.
upper-right corner.
87
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Replying to or forwarding messages
When you respond to messages, you can
select whether to include the original text
DID YOU KNOW
?
The VersaMail application
sends all messages as plain text only, with all
HTML tags stripped, even if you are
forwarding or replying to a message that was
originally received as HTML.
1
2
From the Inbox or another folder, open
the message you want to respond to.
In Message View, select Reply. Select
whether to reply to just the sender or to
reply to both the sender and all
addressees on the message.
3
4
Enter your reply.
3
4
If a large incoming message is
truncated, select More
Select Send.
.
TIP You can also tap the folder icon to the left
of the attachment name to open a menu of
tasks you can do with the attachment,
including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on
the attachment file type; Save to card to save
the attachment to an expansion card; or select
Viewer to select the application you want to
use to view the attachment.
TIP When viewing a message, tap the scroll
arrows at the top of the screen to view the
previous or next message.
Select Done.
88
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Viewing attachments
TIP You can also tap the folder icon to the left
of the attachment name to open a menu of
tasks you can do with the attachment,
including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on
the attachment file type; Save to card to save
the attachment to an expansion card; or select
Viewer to select the application you want to
use to view the attachment.
There are a number of attachment types
you can open with the built-in software
on your smartphone (for example,
Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and
PDF files; ringtones; and photos).
1
From any folder, open the message with
the attachment you want to view.
Messages with downloaded
3
When you finish with the attachment,
select Done to return to the
Attachments dialog box.
attachments appear with a paper clip
icon to the left of the message icon.
TIP If an attachment is not downloaded
because it is larger than your maximum
message size, the paper clip icon does not
appear, and the attachment does not display
at the bottom of the message screen. Select
More to download and display any
attachments.
NOTE If there is no Done button, press
Applications and select Email to
return to the account’s Inbox.
Managing your messages
The status icons that appear near the
messages in your Inbox indicate the
following:
2
Tap the attachment name at the bottom
of the message screen to view it in the
default viewer on your smartphone.
0
The message is unread when the
subject appears in bold.
The message includes an
attachment.
89
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
The message includes a meeting
invitation.
2
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Delete on the Message menu.
This message has high priority.
If a confirmation dialog box appears,
select OK to confirm deletion.
You can rearrange the message list to
make it easier to find and view messages.
TIP To delete a single message, select the
envelope icon next to the message, and then
select Delete from the list.
•
In the Inbox, select Sort, and then
select one of the following: Sort by
Date, Sort by Name, Sort by Subject.
Deleting messages by date
You can quickly delete a group of
messages by selecting a range of dates.
•
To quickly switch between folders in list
view, select the folder pick list at the
top of the screen and select the desired
folder.
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Delete Old on the Message
menu.
Deleting selected messages from the
Inbox
3
Select the folder and a date range for
the messages you want to delete.
When you delete a message from the
Inbox, it moves to the Trash folder.
4
5
Select OK.
If a confirmation dialog box appears,
select OK to confirm deletion.
1
Select the bullet next to the icon of each
message that you want to delete. To
select adjacent messages, drag the
stylus so it touches the bullet to the left
of each message. Lift the stylus and
drag again to select more adjacent
messages.
TIP To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open
the Message menu and select Empty Trash.
90
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Switching accounts
and more. For complete information on all
of the email settings you can customize,
see the User Guide for the VersaMail
Application on your computer.
If you create more than one email account
in VersaMail, you need to switch from
account to account to get, send, and
otherwise manage the messages in each
account.
Windows: Start>Programs>Palm
Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD and
click the link to the User Guide for the
VersaMail Application in the
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Accounts, and then select an
account.
Documentation folder.
DID YOU KNOW If you assigned VersaMail to a
?
Scheduling Auto Sync
quick button, you can press that button
repeatedly to switch between your different
email accounts.
You can set up VersaMail to automatically
download new email messages to your
smartphone with the Auto Sync feature.
Customizing your email settings
TIP You need to set up a separate Auto Sync
schedule for each email account. This feature
may not work with email accounts that require
VPN connection.
You can customize the VersaMail settings
for each individual email account on your
Treo. The preferences you set apply only to
the email account you are currently
viewing. If you have multiple accounts,
configure each account separately.
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
You can set up a schedule to automatically
retrieve email messages; set preferences
for how and when messages are retrieved;
add a signature to an outgoing message;
Preferences.
91
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
3
Select Auto Sync.
TIP After you set up a scheduled Auto Sync
and select Get Mail, from then on, only new
messages are retrieved during Auto Sync.
Selecting alert tones
When you schedule Auto Sync for a given
account, you can choose a sound—such as
a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you
know when new email arrives.
4
5
Check the Auto-sync box.
1
From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
Select the Every pick list and select the
time interval, from 5 minutes to
12 hours.
.
2
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
NOTE If you set a more frequent interval,
you may need to recharge your Treo battery
more often.
3
4
Select Alerts.
Check the Alert me of new mail box.
TIP To receive notifications of successful Auto
Sync retrievals only, uncheck the Alert me of
auto sync failures box. Leave the box
checked if you want to receive notifications of
both successful and failed Auto Sync
retrievals.
6
Select the Start Time and End Time
boxes, and then select the hour, the
minute, and AM or PM to enter the time
for the first and last Auto Sync to take
place. Select OK.
7
8
Select the days you want the schedule
to be active. You can choose any
number of days, but you can set up only
one schedule for each email account.
5
6
Select the Alert Sound pick list, and
then select a sound. Your Treo plays a
brief demo of the sound.
Select OK, and then select Get Mail.
Select OK.
92
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Setting preferences for getting messages
Unread messages (IMAP accounts
only): Downloads only unread mail to
your smartphone. If you don’t check this
box and you select Get & Send, all the
messages on your mail server are
downloaded to your Inbox, including
messages you’ve read.
1
2
3
From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
Select Incoming.
TIP The POP protocol does not support
retrieval of unread mail only from the server. If
you have a POP email account, VersaMail
downloads all messages regardless of
whether you have read them, and regardless
of whether the Unread messages box is
checked.
Mail from last: Gets messages sent
within the number of days you specify.
4
Set any of the following preferences,
and then select OK.
Download attachments: Automatically
downloads files attached to email,
except for attachments that exceed the
maximum message size.
Get: Indicates whether to get message
subjects only or entire messages.
Ask Every Time: Indicates if you want
to see a dialog box for selecting
subjects only or entire messages each
time you retrieve email. If the box is
unchecked, messages are retrieved
according to the option you select in the
Get pick list.
Maximum message size: Sets the
maximum size of an incoming email
message. Enter the size in kilobytes
(KB). The default is 5KB, but you can
enter any size up to 2048KB
[approximately 2 megabytes (MB)],
93
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
including attachments. The maximum
message size that you can retrieve is
60KB for the body text and
approximately 5MB of total data for any
attachments.
4
5
Check the Attach Signature box.
Enter your signature information, and
then select OK.
Working with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync
Message Format: Sets the format for
messages you retrieve.
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with
the VersaMail, Calendar, and Contacts apps
on your smartphone to directly access
corporate groupware information on a
Microsoft Exchange 2003 server. You can
synchronize business email, calendar, and
contact info with the Exchange 2003
server from your smartphone without
using a desktop computer.
• HTML: Displays messages sent in
HTML format with basic formatting
intact and displays other messages as
plain text.
• Text: Displays all messages as plain
text, regardless of the format in which
they were sent.
When you create a Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync account in the VersaMail
application, your email, calendar, and
contact info sync directly with the
Exchange Server; information does not
sync with the desktop software application
on your computer, such as Microsoft
Outlook or Palm Desktop software. Other
information that is stored on your
computer, such as tasks and memos,
continues to synchronize with your desktop
software.
Attaching a signature to a message
You can attach a personal signature, with
info like your company’s address and
phone numbers, to the bottom of all
messages you send.
1
2
3
From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
Select Signature.
94
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
For complete info on using a Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync account, see the
User Guide for the VersaMail Application
on your computer.
Creating and sending a text message
Each text message can have up to
160 characters. Messages with more than
160 characters are automatically split into
several messages. (If you send a text
message to an email address, the email
address is deducted from the
Windows: Start > Programs > Palm
Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD and
click the link to the User Guide for the
VersaMail Application in the
160-character count.)
Documentation folder.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can page someone to call
you by sending them a blank text message.
Messaging
1
2
3
Press Messaging
.
Select New.
You can use the Messaging application to
exchange brief text messages (SMS) and
multimedia messages (MMS) with other
devices and email addresses that support
these forms of messaging. Before you use
your Treo to send or receive messages,
refer to your service plan for pricing and
availability of messaging services.
Select the To field to address the
message:
• Press Center
name appears in the list of recent
addresses, select it from the list.
. If the recipient’s
• If the recipient is in your Contacts list,
enter the first initial and last name (no
spaces), and then select the
recipient’s phone number or email
address, depending on where you
want to send the message.
DID YOU KNOW You can address messages to
?
multiple recipients by separating the
addresses with a comma. If you address a
single message to three people, you will be
billed for three messages.
95
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
• If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list
of recent addresses or your Contacts
list, enter the phone number or email
address.
TIP If you see numbers when you expect to
see letters (or the other way around), you
need to turn Option Lock on by pressing
Option twice or turn it off by pressing Option
once.
5
Select Send.
NOTE Sending text messages to land line
phones may not be supported.
TIP Select Save as Draft to save a draft of the
message without sending it. To access the
draft, select the category pick list at the top of
the screen and select Drafts.
4
Enter your message or select
QuickText
to insert predefined
phrases. To insert emoticons, select
.
Creating and sending a multimedia
message
TIP To add a new QuickText phrase, select
Edit QuickText from the list.
KEY TERM Slide A collection of text, pictures,
videos, and sounds that are grouped together
within a multimedia message. During
playback, all the items within a particular slide
appear on the same screen. If a multimedia
message contains multiple slides, each slide
can be viewed separately during playback.
NOTE Some symbols can’t be used in text
messages. The Messaging application
automatically replaces invalid characters.
96
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Multimedia messages consist of text,
photos, videos, and sounds presented as
one or more slides.You can include any of
the following items:
• If the recipient’s name is not in the list
of recent addresses or your Contacts
list, enter the phone number or email
address.
0
5
6
Enter a subject.
Item
Supported File Types
JPEG, GIF, WBMP
MPEG4, 3GGP, 3GPP2
MIDI
Select the image placeholder, and then
select one of the following:
Pictures
Videos
Attach image: Insert one photo or
video from your smartphone or an
expansion card.
Ringtones
Sound clips
AMR, QCELP
Take new picture: Take a picture with
the built-in camera and add it to the
message.
1
2
3
4
Press Messaging
Select New.
.
Take new video: Capture a short video
with the built-in camcorder and add it to
the message.
Select Add Media.
Select the To field to address the
message with up to 25 addresses:
• Press Center
. If the recipient’s
name appears in the list of recent
addresses, select it from the list.
• If the recipient is in your Contacts list,
enter the first initial and last name (no
spaces), and then select the
recipient’s phone number or email
address.
97
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
TIP When creating a message, you can
preview or delete an item. Highlight the item,
press Center on the 5-way, and then select
Remove, View, or Play.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can send a contact or
calendar entry. Select the entry, open the
Record menu, select Send, and then select
Messaging.
7
(Optional) Select Sound , and then
Receiving messages
select one of the following:
When your phone is turned on and is in an
Record new: Record a sound clip of up area of wireless coverage, you
to 1 minute.
automatically receive new text messages.
For multimedia messages, you can set
your smartphone to automatically
download new messages or to notify you
that a message is ready to be downloaded
smartphone notifies you when a new
message arrives (see Selecting Messaging
Attach voice memo: Select a memo
you recorded in the Voice Memo
application.
Attach ringtone: Select a ringtone.
8
9
Enter a text message or caption.
Select Add slide to insert additional
slides.
10 (Optional) Select Preview to view the
The new message alert may include any of
the following buttons:
message as the recipient will see it.
11 (Optional) Press Menu
, and then
•
OK: Dismisses the alert and places the
select High Priority from the Compose
menu to mark the message as urgent.
message in your Inbox.
•
Reply: Opens Chat View, where you
can reply with a text message. To send
an MMS reply, select Add from Chat
View.
12 Select Send.
98
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
•
•
•
Call Back: Dials the sender’s phone
number.
Using links in messages
When you receive a text message that
Go To Msg: Opens the message so you contains a telephone number, email
can view its full contents.
address, or URL, you can dial the number,
send an email message, or go to the web
page immediately.
Delete: Moves the message from your
Inbox to the Deleted folder.
1
2
Press Messaging
.
Select the message that contains the
link you want to use.
3
Select the phone number, email
address, or URL (appears as underlined
blue text).
Your Treo automatically launches the
appropriate application from the link.
Viewing/playing a multimedia message
TIP When you receive a message, you can
1
2
3
Press Messaging
.
also press Send to call the sender.
Select the message you want to view.
TIP If you have multiple alerts, the Alert dialog
box displays all your pending alerts. Select an
item’s description to jump to that item, or
check the box to clear that item. To view all
your pending alerts from any screen on your
smartphone, press and hold Center on the
5-way.
If there are sounds or multiple slides,
playback begins immediately.
4
Do any of the following:
• Use the onscreen controls to scroll to
other slides and messages.
99
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
• To view message details, press Menu
and select Message Details from
the Message menu.
• To save a calendar or contact entry,
open the message details. You can
access saved entries later by pressing
Applications
Calendar
and selecting
or Contacts
(depending on the type of entry you
saved).
• To save a sound, press Menu
select Save Sound from the
Message menu. You can access
saved sounds later by pressing
, and
5
Select OK.
Arranging your messages
Applications
Sounds
and selecting
or Voice Memo
You can rearrange the messages in any
folder by using the Sort command.
.
,
• To save a picture, press Menu
1
Press Messaging
.
and select Save Picture from the
Message menu. You can access
saved pictures later by pressing
Applications
Pics&Videos
and selecting
.
• To copy the text, use the stylus to
highlight the text, then press Menu
, select Edit, and then select
Copy.
• To stop playback of a message, select
Play/Stop.
2
Select the folder list in the title bar and
select the folder you want to sort.
100
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
3
4
Press Menu
.
Chatting with Messaging
Select View, and then select Sort by
Name or Sort by Date.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can send and receive text
messages even while you are on a phone call.
This is easiest when using a hands-free device
or the speakerphone.
Deleting messages
You can delete several messages at once
from any folder by using the Purge
command.
When you exchange more than one
message with a single contact, the
messages you exchange with that person
are grouped into a chat session. When you
select a chat session from your message
list, the upper part of Chat View displays all
messages you’ve exchanged with this
contact, and the lower part provides an
entry area.
TIP To delete an individual message, highlight
it in the message list, and then select Delete.
1
2
Press Messaging
.
Select the folder list in the title bar and
select the folder that contains the
messages you want to delete.
You can carry on multiple chats at the same
time and easily switch between them,
using the pick list at the top of the screen.
3
4
5
Press Menu
.
Select Purge from the Message menu.
Select the Purge pick list, and then
TIP To find a chat you had with someone, open
your Messaging Inbox and select a chat
session.
select an option.
6
Select OK.
1
2
Press Messaging
.
Do one of the following:
Start a new chat: Select a message
and reply to it.
101
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Continue an existing chat: Select a
message that displays the Chat
icon.
Create new messages as: Indicates
whether text or multimedia messaging
is the default format for a new
message.
3
4
Enter your message.
Request Receipts (MMS only):
Indicates whether you want to receive a
confirmation when an outgoing MMS
message is delivered.
TIP Pale gray text indicates that a message is
pending or enroute.
Select Send.
NOTE If your wireless service provider
supports delivery receipts for text
messages, an additional setting appears
here.
Customizing your Messaging settings
1
2
3
Press Messaging
Press Menu
.
.
Confirm message deletions: Indicates
whether you want deletion confirmation
prompts to appear.
From the Options menu, select
Preferences.
4
On the Messages tab, set any of the
following preferences for your individual
messages:
Privacy Mode (hide text): Indicates
whether you want the body text to
102
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
appear in the alert when you receive a
new message, or whether you want the
alert to hide the text and prompt you to
go to the message.
Display my name in chat window as:
Enter the name you want to use as the
label for your messages in Chat View.
Label color: Select a color to
Message validity period: Indicates
how long you want an outgoing
message to be valid.
differentiate your messages from the
sender’s messages while in Chat View.
Use color for: Indicate whether you
want both your name and message text
in the selected label color, or only your
name.
5
Select the Chat tab and set any of the
following preferences for chat sessions.
6
Select the Network tab and set any of
the following preferences for network
connections.
Create chats from messages: Indicate
when you want to group messages
from the same person into a chat.
Show timestamps in chats: Indicate
whether you want to see the local date
and time the message was sent next to
each message.
Automatically collect MMS
messages: Indicate whether you want
to download multimedia messages
automatically.
103
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
Even when roaming: Indicate whether
you want to automatically receive
3
Select Options, and then select Alerts.
multimedia messages while roaming.
Network Configuration: Indicate if you
want to use Automatic or Manual
message retrieval. If you select Manual,
select Edit and enter your wireless
service provider’s settings.
NOTE We recommend that you do not
change the Network Configuration
settings.
4
5
6
Select the Application pick list and
select Messaging.
Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
7
Select OK.
Selecting Messaging alert tones
Select the Vibrate pick list and select
when you want your smartphone to
vibrate.
DID YOU KNOW
?
Your Treo includes a silent alert
that can vibrate even when the Ringer switch
is set to Sound Off.
7
8
Select the Message Tone pick list and
select a tone for incoming message
alerts for a message alert.
1
2
Press Messaging
Press Menu
.
Check the boxes if you want to see
onscreen alerts when a new message
arrives and when a message you sent is
received.
.
9
Select Done.
104
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
What are all those icons?
A multimedia message that is ready
for you to download
TIP By default, the Messaging app shows the
Inbox folder. To view a different folder, select
the folder list in the title bar and select a
different folder from the list.
A multimedia message that is fully
downloaded
A multimedia message that is fully
downloaded and contains sound
The message descriptions in the Inbox,
Outbox, and Sent folders show the
message status:
A voicemail page
A message that is waiting to be
sent
•
•
•
Unread messages appear in bold.
Read messages appear in plain text.
A receipt, which you requested,
confirming delivery of the message
Urgent messages appear with a red
exclamation point (!).
An outgoing message with an error
The following icons show the message
type and additional status info:
DID YOU KNOW
?
If you are outside a coverage
area or if your phone is turned off, outgoing
messages go into the Outbox. When you
return to a coverage area or turn your phone
on, your pending messages are automatically
sent and transferred to the Sent folder.
A text message
A chat session
105
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
4
106
CHAPTER
5
Your connections to the web
and wireless devices
You use the web for many things: driving directions, shopping,
news, web-based email. Now, with your wireless service
provider network and the built-in web browser, you can take
the web with you almost anywhere.
The built-in Bluetooth® feature of your Palm® Treo™ 680
smartphone helps you easily set up wireless connections to a
number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of
cable-free connectivity. You can also use your smartphone to
connect your computer to the Internet and to share contacts or
your favorite photos with other people.
Benefits
•
Carry the web with you
•
•
Connect to Bluetooth headsets
and car kits
•
Store web pages for offline
viewing
Connect your computer to the
Internet through your smartphone
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
content without scrolling left or right. You
can also switch to Wide Page Mode if you
like.
Web browser
The Blazer® web browser on your Treo
provides quick and easy access to web
pages. You can view most sites you use on
your computer, including those with
security and advanced features, such as
JavaScript and frames. To browse the web,
you must activate data services from your
wireless service provider.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can send email from a
web page on your Treo. Email addresses
appear as links on web pages. After you
configure an email application on your Treo,
you can select an email address link to create
a message to the selected address.
Optimized Mode
DID YOU KNOW The security certificates and
?
128-bit Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption
let you visit secure websites, like ones for
banking and using email. Some secure sites
also require specific browsers, so those may
not work with your web browser.
DID YOU KNOW The web browser supports
?
JavaScript, SSL strong encryption, and
cookies, but does not support plug-ins (such
as Flash or Shockwave) or Java applets.
Wide Page Mode
Viewing a web page
To make viewing web pages on your Treo a
better experience, the web browser
reformats web pages into a single column
and resizes images. In this format—called
Optimized Mode—you can see most
109
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
1
Press Applications
and select Web
Follow a link to another web page: In
Optimized Mode, highlight the link by
pressing Left or Right and then
to open the Blazer web browser. If
necessary, select Yes to turn on your
phone, and Ye s to connect to the
Internet.
press Center
to go to the selected
page. In Wide Page Mode, use the
stylus to select a link.
If you do not see either of these icons
in the title bar, data services are
not available in your current location and
you cannot connect to the Internet.
Submit a form: Enter the info and then
select the onscreen button to submit
the form. If the form doesn’t have an
onscreen button, press Return
.
2
Enter a web page address (URL) in the
Address Bar and select Go.
TIP To adjust the font size, open the Options
menu and select Font. To fit more text on the
screen, select Small. To make the text easier
to read, select Large.
NOTE If you browse to a secure web
page, a lock
icon appears in the
Address Bar.
3
Do any of the following to navigate
within the web page:
4
Use the 5-way
the following icons in the title bar:
to access any of
View a page in wide layout format (as
on your computer): Press Menu
0
Goes to your home page.
,
Opens a dialog box where you
can enter a web address or view
a list of recently viewed web
pages.
select Options, and then select Wide
Page Mode.
Scroll through the page: In Optimized
Mode (the default format) press Up
or Down . In Wide Page Mode, use all
Goes back in order through
pages you viewed.
buttons on the 5-way
to scroll in
Goes forward in order through
pages you viewed.
any direction.
110
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
4
5
Change the entries in the Name and
Description fields.
Gets the latest version of the
current web page. This is
sometimes called refreshing the
web page.
Select OK, and then select OK again.
Opens a list where you can
select Fast mode (no images or
style sheets) or Normal mode
(with images and style sheets).
Creating a bookmark
With bookmarks, you can instantly access
a web page without entering the address
every time. The web browser can store up
to 100 bookmarks or saved pages, allowing
you to open your favorite web pages
quickly. Note that a bookmark is different
from a saved page and different from a
Saving a page
You can use the web browser to save a
page for offline viewing, so you don’t need
a wireless connection to view it later.
1
2
3
4
Go to the page you want to save.
Press Menu
.
DID YOU KNOW The predefined bookmarks
?
Select Save Page from the Page menu.
take you to pages that are optimized for your
Treo.
Select OK, and then select OK again.
1
2
3
Go to the page you want to bookmark.
Viewing bookmarks or saved pages
Press Menu
.
Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in
Bookmarks View. Saved pages are
indicated by a small triangle in the
upper-right corner of the bookmark.
Select Add Bookmark from the Page
menu.
111
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
Editing or deleting a bookmark or saved
page
DID YOU KNOW You can make Bookmarks
?
View the default view when you open the
browser. Open the Options menu and select
Preferences. Select the Start With pick list
and select Bookmarks.
1
2
In Bookmarks View, press Menu
.
Select Edit Bookmarks from the
Bookmarks menu.
3
Select the bookmark you want to edit or
delete.
1
Select the Bookmarks View
icon.
TIP If you can’t edit, delete, or beam a
bookmark, it is probably locked and these
actions are prohibited.
4
5
Enter the desired changes or select
Delete.
Select OK.
Arranging bookmarks and saved pages
2
Select the bookmark or saved page you
want to view.
Bookmarks View has ten pages where you
can store and arrange bookmarks and
saved pages in a way that works for you.
For example, you can store travel links on
one bookmark page, stock links on another,
and business links on a third page.
TIP To go back to the last web page you
viewed without selecting a bookmark, select
Page View.
112
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
1
In Bookmarks View, press Menu
.
example, if you download an MP3 file, you
can listen to it later in the Pocket Tunes™
application. If a file is not recognized by any
application on your Treo 680 you cannot
open it on your Treo. You can, however,
download the file to an expansion card,
transfer it to your computer using an
expansion card reader (sold separately),
and view it on your computer.
You can download files such as new
applications and choose to play or save
music and video files in many popular
formats—provided that the website
permits the downloading of files:
2
Select Edit Bookmarks from the
Bookmarks menu.
3
4
Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.
Use the stylus to drag and drop a
bookmark into the desired slot. You can
move a bookmark within the current
page or move it to a different bookmark
page by dragging and dropping it on one
Item
Supported File Types
Pictures
JPEG, WBMP, GIF,
animated GIF
of the Bookmark Page
icons at the
Videos
MP4, 3G2, ASF, WMV
MIDI, AAC
bottom of the screen.
Ringtones
Music
5
Select OK.
MP3, WMA
Downloading files from a web page
The web browser lets you download files
that are recognized by one of the
applications on your Treo 680. When you
download a file, you can open it in the
application that recognizes the file. For
TIP You can also access software and other
downloads using the Downloads bookmark.
113
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
1
2
Go to the page with the link to the file
you want to download.
TIP The web browser recognizes streamed
content that is not supported by any of the
applications on your Treo 680, and it displays a
Media type not supported message.
Do one of the following:
• In Optimized Mode, press Left or
Right to highlight the link to the
file, and then press Center
.
2
Once streaming begins, playback starts
automatically. Use the following
controls when viewing or listening:
• In Wide Page Mode, tap the link with
your stylus.
• Select
to return to the web page
3
4
If prompted, select what you want to do
with the file: Play, Save To Device, or
Save To Card.
containing the streamed content.
• Select
pause playback.
or press Center
to
to
Select Yes.
• Select
resume playback after pausing.
or press Center
TIP You can also save an image from a web
page by tapping and holding it with the stylus.
• A few seconds after playback begins,
the toolbar is hidden and you can view
the content on the full screen. Press
Streaming files from a web page
The web browser lets you stream files that
are recognized by one of the applications
on your Treo 680. For example, you can
choose to play music and video files in
many popular formats (MP3, WMA, WMV).
Up
or Down
to display the
or Down
toolbar; press Up
again to hide the toolbar again.
• Press the Volume button on the side
of your smartphone to adjust the
volume.
1
When the web browser recognizes
streamed content on a web page, it
Copying text from a web page
displays a Play
listen to the streamed content, select
Play
icon. To view or
You can copy text from a web page and
paste it into other applications.
.
114
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
1
Use the stylus to highlight the text you
want to copy.
2
Select Find Text on Page from the
Page menu.
2
3
4
Press Menu
.
3
4
Enter the text you want to find.
Select Edit, and then select Copy.
Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box
to indicate whether you want the search
to wrap from the end of the page to the
beginning when the end is reached.
Go to the app in which you want to
paste the text and position the cursor
where you want to paste the text.
5
Select Find to start the search.
5
6
Press Menu
.
Select Edit, and then select Paste.
Customizing your web browser settings
1
2
In Page View, press Menu
.
DID YOU KNOW If the web browser does not
?
recognize a phone number as dialable, you
can copy the phone number (as text) and
paste it into the Dial Pad (see Dialing from a
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3
Select Page and set any of the following
preferences:
Returning to recently viewed pages
The History list stores the addresses of the
last 100 pages you visited. Items in the
History list are sorted chronologically.
1
2
3
In Page View, press Menu
.
Select History from the Page menu.
Select the web page you want to load.
Start With: Determines which view
appears when you open the browser.
Finding text on a web page
In Page View, press Menu
1
.
115
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
Home Page: Sets the page that appears
when you select
Disable cookies: Determines whether
.
websites can store personalized info on
your Treo. Some sites do not work
properly if you select this option.
Restore Default: Selects the original
home page, if you changed it.
Disable JavaScript: Bypasses
JavaScript elements on the web pages
you view.
Show Address Bar: Sets whether the
web address appears in Page View.
When it is visible, you can select the
pick list to go to a previously viewed
page or enter a URL directly from Page
View.
Tap and Drag: Determines whether
dragging the stylus selects text or
scrolls through the content of the page.
4
Select General and set any of the
following preferences:
Normal mode/Fast mode: Determines
whether a web page appears as
designed (Normal mode) or with some
of the items removed for faster display.
Selecting Fast mode gives you the
following options:
• Disable cascading style sheets:
Determines whether style sheets are
applied when you load a web page.
When style sheets are disabled,
pages download faster, but you may
lose some of the formatting.
Auto-complete: Determines whether
the web browser suggests text, based
on your previous entries, when you
begin entering info.
KEY TERM Cascading Style Sheets (CSS)
file that governs design elements of a web
page, such as its fonts, colors, and layout.
A
116
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
• Don’t download images!
Cookies: Indicates how much memory
Determines whether images appear
when you load a web page. If you
select not to view images, you can
still see any image by selecting the
placeholder box on the web page.
is being used by cookies. To free up this
memory, select Clear Cookies.
Cache: Indicates how much memory is
being used by your cache to store
recent pages and history. To free up this
memory, select Clear Cache.
TIP Lots of pretty graphics slowing you down?
Browse the web faster by enabling the Don’t
download images! option.
Clear cache on exit: Determines
whether the cache clears each time you
exit the web browser.
5
Select Advanced and set any of the
following preferences:
Set Proxy: Sets up a proxy server to
access the Internet. If your connection
requires a proxy server, please contact
your Internet service provider or IT
administrator for this information.
6
Select OK.
Set memory limit for storing pages:
Sets the amount of memory used for
your cache. Pages are cached so that
they load faster the next time you view
them.
117
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
Creating a partnership between your Treo
and your computer
Connecting your
computer to the
Internet through
your Treo
1
Make sure that your computer’s
Bluetooth setting is on and that your
computer is ready to create a Bluetooth
partnership. Check the documentation
that came with your computer to find
and change these settings.
Dial-up networking (DUN) is the feature
that converts your smartphone into a
modem so that you can access the Internet
from your computer. If your computer is
enabled with Bluetooth wireless
technology, you can set up your
smartphone as a wireless modem using
the built-in Bluetooth technology.
2
3
4
On your smartphone, press
Applications
Bluetooth
and select
.
Select Bluetooth On if it is not already
selected, and then select Setup
Devices.
Select Trusted Devices.
The following procedures describe the
process of setting up your smartphone as a
wireless modem using the built-in
Bluetooth technology.
TIP If your computer is not enabled with
Bluetooth wireless technology, you need to
purchase a wireless Bluetooth adapter
accessory for your computer to use this
feature.
5
Select Add Device. The discovery icon
appears, indicating that the discovery
process is active.
118
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
6
7
Select your computer from the Trusted
Devices list, and then select OK.
Accessing the Internet using a Bluetooth
DUN connection
Make up a passkey, enter it on the
Bluetooth Security screen, and then
The steps for accessing the Internet on
your computer may vary depending on your
select OK. The passkey can be up to 16 operating system and how Bluetooth
numbers.
wireless technology is set up on your
computer—for example, if it is built-in
versus if you are using a Bluetooth adapter.
If you need additional info, check your
computer’s documentation for how to set
up Bluetooth technology to access the
Internet using a DUN connection.
NOTE You need this passkey in the next
step, so be sure to write it down exactly.
We recommend that you use a passkey of
16 numbers, where possible, to improve
the security of your Treo. The longer the
passkey, the more difficult it is for the
passkey to be deciphered.
TIP You may need to use a virtual private
network (VPN) to access corporate email.
Check with your system administrator for
more information.
8
9
Enter the same passkey on your
computer when prompted.
Select Done, and then select Done
again to return to the Bluetooth screen.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Verify that DUN is
enabled on your computer. See the
documentation that came with your
computer for details.
Setting up your computer for a Bluetooth
DUN connection
Follow the instructions from the
manufacturer of your Bluetooth adapter to
enable DUN.
1
Open the Bluetooth application on your
computer and let it locate the Treo you
paired it with in the previous procedure.
119
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
2
Double-click the icon or option
representing your smartphone. Your
computer connects to your smartphone
and shows that DUN services are
available.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can check the status of the
connection by right-clicking the Bluetooth
network icon in the taskbar.
NOTE When a DUN connection is active,
you cannot use data services on your
smartphone. For example, you cannot
browse the Web, or send or receive email
messages. Also, any scheduled automatic
email retrievals do not take place. You can,
however, use other wireless features of
your smartphone, such as making and
receiving phone calls or sending and
receiving text messages.
3
4
Double-click the DUN icon.
Enter your wireless service provider’s
settings. Contact your wireless service
provider if you don’t have these
settings.
5
Click Dial. Once the connection is
successfully established, you can
browse the Internet on your computer
or download your email.
TIP If you get a message asking whether you
want your computer to remember the dial text
for this connection, we recommend that you
say yes. This avoids errors and the
inconvenience of entering the dial text for
every session.
Terminating a Bluetooth DUN Internet
session
It is important to end a Bluetooth DUN
session after you finish using it. Ending the
DUN session lets you use the wireless
features of your Treo 680 that require a
data connection, it frees up the Bluetooth
feature so that you can connect to other
Bluetooth devices, and it optimizes battery
life, too.
6
Look for a network connection icon in
the taskbar at the bottom of your
computer screen to verify that you are
connected.
120
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
1
2
On your computer, right-click the icon or You can create a list of Bluetooth devices
option representing your smartphone.
that you trust to communicate with your
Treo. When communicating with trusted
devices, your Treo skips the discovery
process and creates a secure link as long
as the device is within range. Bluetooth
range is up to 30 feet depending on
environmental conditions, including
Click Disconnect.
Connections with
Bluetooth devices
obstacles, radio interference from nearby
electronic equipment, and other factors.
With the built-in Bluetooth wireless
technology on your Treo, you can connect
to a number of Bluetooth devices,
including a hands-free device such as a
headset or car kit, a printer, or a GPS
receiver, as well as to other smartphones
and handhelds that are equipped with
Bluetooth wireless technology. If your
computer is enabled with Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can also
When you configure a hands-free device,
as described previously in Connecting to a
hands-free device automatically appears in
your Trusted Devices list. Follow the steps
in this section to add other devices to your
Trusted Devices list, such as a friend’s
handheld.
DID YOU KNOW
?
Your Treo does not support
synchronize wirelessly or use your phone
to connect your computer to the Internet.
wireless connections to Bluetooth stereo
headphones.
121
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
Requesting a connection with another
Bluetooth device
5
Select Trusted Devices.
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
Select Bluetooth On.
and select
.
2
6
Select Add Device. The Discovery icon
appears, indicating that the discovery
process is active.
7
8
Select the Show pick list and select
Nearby devices.
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your Treo 680 when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
If the device you want to add doesn’t
appear on the Discovery Results list,
make sure that the other device is ready
to receive a connection request (see the
device’s documentation), and then
select Find More on your Treo to search
again.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to recreate any
partnerships you already created.
9
Enter the same passkey on your
smartphone and on the Bluetooth
device, and select OK.
4
Select Setup Devices.
122
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices
have a preset passkey; if so, you can find
the passkey in the documentation for that
device. Other devices provide a screen
where you enter a passkey that you make
up. In either case, you must use the same
passkey on both your smartphone and the
other Bluetooth device. We recommend
that where possible, you make up a
passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters
(letters and numerals only) to improve the
security of your Treo. The longer the
passkey, the more difficult it is for the
passkey to be deciphered.
2
Select Bluetooth On.
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your Treo 680 when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to recreate any
partnerships you already created.
10 Select Done.
Accepting a connection from another
Bluetooth device
4
Select the Visibility pick list and select
one of the following:
TIP For the smartphone to be visible to
Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth setting must
be set to On and visibility must be set to
Visible or Temporary.
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that
are not on your Trusted Devices list to
request a connection with your
smartphone. Your smartphone remains
accessible to other devices until you
turn this option off. After you’re done
using this setting, remember to change
it back to Hidden.
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
and select
.
123
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
5
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices,
TIP Use the Visible option only when you need
your smartphone to be accessible for an
extended period of time. For short term
accessibility, use the Temporary option.
such as headsets and GPS receivers, have
a preset passkey; if so, you can find the
passkey in the documentation for that
device. Other devices provide a screen
where you enter a passkey that you make
up. In either case, you must use the same
passkey on both your Treo and the other
Bluetooth device. We recommend that
where possible, you make up a passkey of
16 alphanumeric characters (letters and
numerals only) to improve the security of
your Treo. The longer the passkey, the
more difficult it is for the passkey to be
deciphered.
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices
that are not on your Trusted Devices list
to request a connection with your
smartphone during the next two
minutes. Your smartphone reverts to
the Hidden setting and becomes
inaccessible to other devices after two
minutes.
Hidden: Allows only devices with which
you have previously formed a partnership
to request a connection with your
smartphone. New devices cannot request
a connection.
6
(Optional) Check the Add to trusted
device list box if you want to form a
partnership with the requesting device.
7
Select OK.
5
Enter the same passkey on your
smartphone and on the Bluetooth
device.
124
CHAPTER
6
Your photos, videos, and
music
Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family, pets,
and your most recent vacation?
Are you tired of carrying both your MP3 player and your phone?
Your Palm® Treo™ 680 smartphone solves both problems. You can
keep your favorite photos right on your Treo—videos, too. And
there's no need to carry an expensive MP3 player; you can play
music on your Treo. Simply transfer songs onto your Treo or an
expansion card and then listen through your stereo headphones
(cards and headphones sold separately).
Benefits
•
Never be far from your favorite
people, places, and songs
•
No separate photo viewer, MP3,
CD, or mini-disc player required
•
Arrange your photos, videos, and
songs
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
New Albums: Opens a dialog box
where you can enter an album name
and select the storage location
(smartphone or expansion card).
Camera
Your Treo 680 comes with an easy-to-use,
built-in, VGA camera with 2x digital zoom.
You can use the camera to take and view
pictures and videos and send them to your
friends and family. To add a personal touch
to your Treo, use your pictures as your
wallpaper for the Main tab in the Phone
application and as caller ID images.
Taking a picture
You can store pictures on your smartphone
or on an expansion card.
TIP The default camera resolution is VGA (640
x 480) and it also supports QVGA (320 x 240)
resolution. To view these settings before you
take a picture, press Menu.
1
Press Applications
Camera
and select
.
2
By default, the Camera application
stores pictures you take in the PALM
folder on your expansion card (if a card
is inserted). Otherwise, Camera stores
pictures in the PALM album on your
Treo. To store a picture in a different
location, select one of the following:
3
4
5
Find your subject in the screen on your
Treo (the lens is on the back of your
Treo).
(Optional) To get a close-up of your
subject, press Up
to select 2x. Press
Down
to return to 1x.
<Album name>: Stores the picture in
the selected album. The storage
Press Center
to capture the
location is based on the location of the
album (smartphone or expansion card).
picture.
127
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
6
Do any of the following:
TIP To add an audio caption later, open the
picture and then select Audio Caption from
the Photo menu.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can personalize a picture.
Open the Photo menu, select Draw on, and
then use the drawing tools to add your own
personal touch. When you save the picture,
you can replace the original or save a copy.
Recording a video
Saves the picture in the location
you selected in step 2.
You can store videos on your smartphone
or on an expansion card.
Deletes the picture.
1
Press Applications
Camera
Select Camcorder
and select
.
Opens a dialog box where you
can select how you want to send
the picture: Messaging,
Bluetooth, or Email. The receiving
device must support the method
you select.
2
.
TIP The video recording screen displays the
approximate recording time you have left
based on the space available on your
smartphone or expansion card. Actual
recording time may vary depending on how
fast you are moving, how many colors you are
recording, and so on.
Lets you add a voice caption.
3
By default, the Camera application
stores videos you record in the PALM
folder on your expansion card (if a card
is inserted). Otherwise, Camera stores
128
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
pictures in the PALM album on your
Treo. To store a video in a different
location, select one of the following:
4
Find your subject in the screen on your
Treo (the lens is on the back of your
Treo).
<Album name>: Stores the video in the
selected album. The storage location is
based on the location of the album
(smartphone or expansion card).
5
6
Press Center
After you finish recording, press
Center again to stop.
to start recording.
7
Select any of the following:
New Albums: Opens a dialog box
where you can enter an album name
and select the storage location
(smartphone or expansion card).
Plays the video, so you can
review it.
Saves the video in the location
you selected in step 2.
TIP The default camcorder resolution is CIF
(352 x 288) and it also supports QCIF (176 x
144). To view these settings before you
capture a video, press Menu.
Deletes the video.
129
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
Opens a dialog box where you
3
Set any of the following preferences:
can select how you want to send
the video: Messaging, Bluetooth,
or Email. The receiving device
must support the method you
select and video messages.
Effects: Sets the color palette for the
current picture or video. You cannot
change an item’s palette after you take
the picture or video.
Prompt sound: (Pictures only) Sets the
sound that plays before you take
the picture.
Opens a dialog box where you
can adjust the volume during
playback.
Shutter sound: Determines whether a
sound plays when you take a picture.
TIP During playback, tap and drag the
progress indicator bar to jump to a different
section of the video. Select Pause to pause
video playback.
Microphone: (Videos only) Turns the
microphone on and off so that you can
record videos with or without sound.
Resolution: Sets the default size for
newly captured pictures or videos.
Customizing your Camera settings
You can customize the built-in camera’s
settings for your Treo 680.
Date stamp: (Pictures only) Determines
whether the date the picture is taken
appears on your pictures.
1
Go to Camera View
View
Press Menu
or Camcorder
.
Review photos/videos: Determines
whether you can review pictures or
videos before saving them and how
quickly they are automatically saved.
2
. If you are in Camera
View, the Photo Settings screen
appears. If you are in Camcorder View,
the Video Settings screen appears.
Auto naming: Assigns a name to a
series of pictures to be captured, such
as Seattle001, Seattle002, and so on.
130
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
Internet. Your smartphone supports the
following picture formats:
•
•
•
•
JPG
TIF
BMP
GIF
1
2
Press Applications
and select
Pics&Videos
.
Select the album that contains the
picture you want to see.
TIP To view an album from an expansion card,
insert the card and select the album from the
Album list. If the items on the card are not
grouped into albums, select the card name
from the list.
4
Select Done.
3
4
Select the picture you want to view.
Press Right or Left to scroll to the
next item in the album.
Pictures & Videos
DID YOU KNOW
?
To see the outer edges of a
Viewing a picture
picture that may not be visible, use the stylus
to tap and drag the picture in any direction.
In addition to viewing the pictures you
capture with the built-in camera, you can
view pictures captured on many popular
digital cameras or downloaded from the
131
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
5
6
If the picture has a voice caption, select
to hear it.
•
ASF (with MPEG-4 video and
IMA-ADPCM audio)
Tap the picture or press Center
to
•
AVI (with MJPEG video and PCM audio)
return to Thumbnail View.
1
Press Applications
Pics&Videos
and select
TIP In Thumbnail View, you can group photos
or videos to more easily locate them. Select
one of the grouping options from the View
menu.
.
2
3
4
Select the album that contains the video
you want to see.
Select the video you want to view.
Playback begins automatically.
Viewing a video
Hold down Right or Left to seek
within the current video, or press Right
or Left to scroll to the next item in
the album.
In addition to viewing the videos you
capture with the built-in camera, you can
view videos captured on many popular
digital cameras. Your smartphone supports
the following types of video files:
5
Press Center
to return to
Thumbnail View.
•
•
3GP (with H.263 video and AMR audio)
3G2 (with MPEG-4 video and QCELP
audio)
DID YOU KNOW
?
If you pause video playback
and then close the video, the video starts
where you left off the next time you play it.
•
•
•
MP4 (with MPEG-4/H.264 video and
MP3/AAC/AAC+ audio)
Viewing a slide show
MPG (with MPEG-1 video and MPEG-1
audio)
1
Press Applications
Pics&Videos
Select the album you want to view.
and select
.
M4V (with MPEG-4/H.264 video and
MP3/AAC/AAC+ audio)
2
132
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
3
Press Menu
then select Auto-hide Toolbar Off if
you want to see the toolbar.
, select Options, and
3
Select the pictures or videos to send, or
select Select All to send the entire
album. (A + appears next to selected
items.)
4
5
Press Space
show.
to start the slide
DID YOU KNOW
?
You cannot send copyrighted
Press Center
previous view.
to return to the
pictures or videos that appear with a Lock icon
in Thumbnail View or in the Picture list.
TIP To set slide show options such as
background music and transitions, open the
Options menu and select Slideshow
Setting. Keep in mind that background music
overrides audio captions when you’re running
a slide show. Background music for a slide
show also overrides any music that might be
playing using the Pocket Tunes application on
your smartphone.
4
Select Send.
Sending pictures or videos
You can send pictures or videos to an
email address or to other devices that
support picture and video messaging.
5
Select how you want to send the
picture or video: Messaging,
Bluetooth, or Email.
1
From the Album list, select the album
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)
you want to send.
Copying a picture or video
You can copy pictures or videos into
another album. You can also copy pictures
and videos between your smartphone and
an expansion card.
2
Select Send
.
133
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
1
From the Album list, select the album
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)
you want to copy.
7
8
Select the Into album pick list and
select the album you want to copy the
selected items to.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Copy.
Select Copy to from the Photo (or
TIP You can also move pictures and videos
between albums. Open the Photo (or Video)
menu and select Move to. The remaining
steps are the same as copying pictures, but
use the Move commands instead of the Copy
commands.
Video) menu.
4
Select the pictures or videos to copy, or
select Select All to copy the entire
album. (A + appears next to selected
items.)
5
6
Select Copy.
Organizing pictures and videos
Select the Copy items to pick list and
select whether you want to copy the
selected items to your device or to an
expansion card.
1
2
3
Open the album you want to organize.
Press Menu
.
Select Album, and then select Add to
album or Remove from album.
4
5
Select the pictures or videos to add or
remove, or select Select All to add or
remove the entire album. (A + indicates
that you want to add the item. An X
indicates that you want to remove the
item.)
+ sign
indicates a
picture is
selected
Select Add or Remove.
134
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
Adding a picture to a contact entry
DID YOU KNOW You can also open the Album
list from Camera View or Camcorder View by
selecting the icon in the lower-left corner.
?
1
Display the picture you want to add to a
contact.
TIP Install the Palm® Files application from the
Palm Software Installation CD to easily
browse and manage files on an expansion
card.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Save
as Contact.
4
Select the contact you want to add this
picture to.
TIP To change the name, add a caption, or
view other picture or video information,
highlight (or open) the item, open the Photo
(or Video) menu, and select Details.
Rotating a picture
1
2
3
4
Display the picture you want to rotate.
Press Menu
.
Saving a picture as wallpaper
Select Rotate from the Photo menu.
You can select a picture to use as wallpaper
for the Main tab in the Phone application.
Select the orientation.
1
Display the picture you want to save as
wallpaper.
Deleting a picture or video
1
Open the album that contains the
picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Save
as Wallpaper.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Delete from the Photo (or
Video) menu.
4
When the confirmation message
appears, confirm by selecting Yes , or
decline by selecting No.
4
Select the pictures or videos that you
want to delete, or select Select All to
delete the entire album. (An X appears
next to selected items.)
135
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
5
6
Select Delete.
the Media icon. You can refer to the
Palm Desktop Online Help for information
about using the Palm Media desktop
application.
Select Delete to confirm the deletion.
TIP You can also highlight a picture or video in
Thumbnail View, and then press Backspace to
delete the highlighted item.
Pocket Tunes
Viewing pictures and videos on your
computer
You can listen to music through the
speaker on the back of your smartphone or
through a stereo headset or headphones
(stereo headphone adapter or 2.5mm
stereo headphone or headset required,
sold separately). To listen to music on your
smartphone, you need to convert the
music files into MP3 format using
Windows Media Player (Windows
computers) or iTunes (Mac computers),
and then transfer the music files to your
smartphone or an expansion card. After
you transfer the music files, you can play
them using Pocket Tunes on your
When you synchronize your Treo 680, your
pictures and videos are copied to your
desktop computer. You can view pictures in
JPEG format and videos in MPEG-4 format
(3G2 file extension). You can email them to
friends using your desktop email
application.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To view and edit
videos you captured on your smartphone
on your computer, you must first install
QuickTime from the Palm Software
Installation CD.
smartphone.
On a Windows computer, you can view
and edit synchronized pictures and videos
in the Palm Media desktop application.
Open Palm® Desktop software and click
136
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
5
Click the Rip Music tab, click the
Format pick list, and then select mp3.
Click OK.
TIP You can upgrade Pocket Tunes to a version
that supports more music file formats (such as
WMA); supports subscription music; and
includes additional features. For more info,
6
7
Click Tools, and then click Options.
Click the Devices tab, select Palm
Handheld from the Devices list, and
then click Properties.
DID YOU KNOW If a call comes in when you’re
?
listening to music, you can take the call and
the music pauses automatically. After you
finish the call, the music starts again.
Setting up Windows Media Player for
MP3
On a Windows computer, you need to set
Windows Media Player to save your music
files in MP3 format in order for the files to
be compatible with Pocket Tunes.
Select your
smartphone
Click
1
2
3
Connect your smartphone to your
computer with the sync cable.
Properties
Press Applications
pTunes
and select
.
On your computer, open Windows
Media Player, and then click the
full-screen icon in the upper-right
corner to maximize the window.
8
Click the Quality tab, uncheck the
Convert files as required by this
handheld (recommended) box. Click
Apply.
4
Click Tools, and then click Options.
137
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
3
4
5
Click the Advanced button at the top of
the window, and then click Importing.
Click the Import Using pop-up menu
and select MP3 Encoder.
Uncheck
box
Click the Setting pop-up menu and
select Good Quality.
TIP Mac If you want greater control over the
file size and sound quality of your MP3 files,
select Custom from the Setting pop-up
menu.
Transferring MP3 files from your computer
9
Click OK, and then click OK again.
If your MP3 files are already on your
computer’s hard drive, you just need to
transfer them onto your smartphone to
listen to them with Pocket Tunes.
You now have set up Windows Media
Player to transfer MP3 files to the Pocket
Tunes application on your smartphone.
If an expansion card is inserted into the
smartphone, Windows Media Player
Setting up iTunes for MP3
On a Mac, use iTunes (included with OS X) copies the MP3 files to the expansion card.
to convert music from a CD to MP3 format. If you don’t have an expansion card
For more information on using the iTunes
software, see the documentation that
came with your Mac.
inserted, the MP3 files are copied to your
Treo.
IMPORTANT You must synchronize your
smartphone with your computer at least
once before you can transfer MP3 files
from your computer.
1
2
On your Mac, open iTunes.
Select Preferences.
138
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
BEFORE YOU BEGIN On a Mac, you need
an expansion card (sold separately) to
listen to music on your Treo. You cannot
transfer MP3 files from your Mac directly
onto your Treo.
Mac: Drag and drop the MP3 files onto
the Send To Handheld droplet in the
Palm folder. Select your device name,
the file name, and the destination (card).
Click OK. Synchronize your Treo with
your computer. Be patient; transferring
music to an expansion card can take
several minutes.
1
2
Connect your Treo to your computer
with the USB sync cable.
On your smartphone, press
Applications
pTunes
and select
.
3
4
If you are transferring MP3 files from a
Mac, insert an expansion card into your
Treo. This step is optional for Windows
users.
TIP You can also use a card reader accessory
(sold separately) to transfer MP3 files from
your computer to your expansion card. Create
a Music_Audio folder in the root directory of
the card, and store your MP3 files in this
folder.
Do one of the following:
Windows: Open Windows Media
Player on your computer. Select the
Sync tab, and then select Palm
Handheld from the drop-down list.
Select Start Sync. The files are
transferred to your smartphone.
Transferring music from a CD to your
smartphone
If your songs are on a CD and you want to
listen to them on your smartphone, you
need to convert them to MP3 format on
your computer before you transfer the files
to your smartphone.
NOTE Do not press the sync button on
your cable. Windows Media Player
transfers the files, so there’s no need to do
anything.
139
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
WINDOWS ONLY
6
Transfer the MP3 files to your
1
2
On your computer, open Windows
Media Player.
Insert the music CD into your
computer’s CD drive.
Listening to music on your Treo
CAUTION Protect your hearing. Listening
to this device at full volume for a long
period of time can damage your hearing.
3
4
Select the Rip tab.
Select the tracks you want to convert to
MP3.
5
6
Select Rip Music.
1
Make sure the Ringer switch is set to
sounds for more information.
Transfer the MP3 files to your
2
Press Applications
pTunes
and select
.
MAC ONLY
TIP You can change the settings on your Treo
so that pressing and holding the Side button
for details.
1
2
On your Mac, open iTunes.
Insert the music CD into the CD drive
on your Mac.
3
4
5
Check the boxes next to the tracks you
want to convert to MP3.
3
Use the 5-way
the following icons:
to access any of
Click the Import button in the
upper-right corner of the iTunes window.
Play: Plays or resumes playback of
the current song.
When the songs are finished importing,
click the Eject Disk button in the
lower-right corner of the iTunes window.
Next song: Plays the next song.
Previous song: Plays the previous
song.
140
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
Choose song: Displays a list of
songs to choose from.
Pocket Tunes continues playing until it
reaches the end of your list or until you
select Pause . Music continues to play
even if you switch to another application or
turn off your screen. If you want to stop
playing music when you exit Pocket Tunes,
open the Background Prefs menu and
uncheck the Enable background play box,
and then select OK.
Pause: Pauses playback.
DID YOU KNOW You can also press Space to
?
pause and resume playback, as well as use
the 5-way to navigate among songs or pause
and resume playback.
NOTE To adjust the volume during
playback, press the Volume button on the
side of your Treo.
Creating a playlist
If you want to play a group of songs in a
particular order, you can create a playlist.
1
Press Applications
pTunes
Press Menu
and select
Progress
indicator
.
Play/Pause
Volume
2
3
.
Select Actions, and then select
Manage Playlists.
4
Select New, and then enter a name for
the playlist.
Next
song
Choose
song
Previous
song
141
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
6
5
Select Add Song. Select the songs you
want to include on the playlist.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Actions, and then select
Manage Playlists.
4
5
Highlight a playlist, and then select Edit.
Do any of the following:
• To delete a song from the playlist,
select the song and then select
Remove.
• To add a song, select Add Song,
check a song’s box, and then
select Done.
6
Select Save List.
• To move a song up or down one slot,
select a song and then select Up or
Down.
TIP To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket
Tunes, select Choose Songs, and then select
Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play,
and then select All.
6
Select Save List.
TIP To delete a playlist, select Manage
Playlists from the Actions menu, select the
playlist, and then select Delete List. Select
Yes to confirm the deletion.
Editing a playlist
Press Applications
pTunes
1
and select
.
142
CHAPTER
7
Your personal information
organizer
Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those
scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm® Treo™ 680 smartphone is all
you need to organize your personal information and keep it with
you wherever you go.
You never lose your information, even if your battery is
completely drained. All of your personal info is backed up each
time you synchronize, and your info is kept private when you
use the security features on your Treo. Also, you can easily
share info with others electronically.
Benefits
•
Track current, future, and past
appointments
•
•
Set reminders for appointments,
birthdays, important tasks, and
more
•
Make to-do lists that get done
Before you call your friend in
London, check the time first
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
list that are overdue or due today. If
there’s room, Agenda View also lists
events on future dates.
Calendar
Calendar is a powerful organizer application
that helps you manage your schedule. You
can view your calendar by day, week, or
month, or as an agenda list that combines
your Tasks list and email notifications with
your appointments. Schedule repeating
meetings or a block of vacation time by
creating an event that repeats at an interval
you specify. Color-code your appointments
by category and add notes with helpful
information.
•
•
Day View: Shows your daily schedule
one day at a time.
Week View: Shows your schedule for
an entire week. The time frames are
based on the Start Time and End Time
settings in Calendar Preferences.
•
Month View: Shows your schedule for
a whole month.
DID YOU KNOW If your company uses
?
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be
able to wirelessly synchronize Calendar
events directly with the server. See Working
information.
In most Calendar views, you can do the
following:
•
Open the Options menu and select
Year View to view a calendar for an
entire year.
Displaying your calendar
Press Calendar
through the various views:
repeatedly to cycle
•
Use the 5-way
to go to another
day, week, month, or year —based on
the current view. (Not available in
Agenda View.)
•
Agenda View: Shows your daily
schedule, the number of unread email
messages, and any items on your Tasks
145
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
•
Select Go To, and then select a date
from the calendar. (Not available in
Agenda View.)
3
Using the keyboard, enter a starting
hour and minute for the event, such as
545 for 5:45.
4
5
Select the End Time box and enter the
ending hour and minute for the event.
Creating an event
To assign a time zone to the event,
select the Time Zone pick list and
select a city in the time zone you want.
TIP If you have several appointments to enter,
it’s more efficient to use Palm® Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook on your
computer and then synchronize your Treo 680
with your computer. For more information,
6
7
Select OK.
Enter a description for the event.
IMPORTANT If you use Palm Desktop
software, do not add time zones to your
events. Palm Desktop does not support
time zones.
Press Calendar
appears.
until Day View
1
Select Go To and then select the
desired day.
If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use
the time zone feature, but you must install
the conduit that came with your Treo 680
(or a subsequent update) on all the
computers with which you sync your
smartphone. Chapura PocketMirror and
other earlier Microsoft Outlook conduits do
not support time zones.
Selected
date
Selected
day
0
2
Select New.
146
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
4
Select OK.
TIP To automatically assign a time zone to your
events, open the Options menu, select
Preferences, and check the New events use
time zones box. All your new events will be
assigned to your local time zone (existing
events aren’t affected), and you can change
the time zone setting for individual events.
Type of time
units
Number of
time units
TIP If you want your events with time zones to
stay at the same time in Calendar, regardless
of the time zone you are in, go to Date & Time
Preferences, select the Automatically set
pick list, and select Date and time. If you
select Date, time and time zone, the event
time shifts if you travel to a different time
information.
DID YOU KNOW
?
When an alarm occurs, the
Alert dialog box displays all your pending
alerts. Select an alert description to jump to
that item, or check the box to clear that alert.
Creating an untimed event
Adding an alarm to an event
An untimed event, such as a holiday or
deadline, does not occur at a particular
time.
1
2
3
In Calendar, select the event.
Select Details.
Check the Alarm box and select the
number of minutes, hours, or days
before the event you would like to
receive the alarm.
Press Calendar
until you are in Day
View.
5
Press Left or Right to go to the
date of the event.
TIP The alarm for untimed events is defined by
minutes, days, or hours before midnight of the
date of the event.
6
Make sure no times are highlighted.
147
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
7
Enter a description for the event.
A diamond appears next to the
description of an untimed event.
select Other to define a custom
interval.
4
Select OK.
Scheduling a repeating event
This icon
TIP To enter a birthday or anniversary, add this
info to the person’s Contacts entry and it
automatically appears in your Calendar.
indicates a
repeating
event.
TIP To enter a holiday, create an untimed
event. Then, from the Details screen, select
Every year as the repeat interval.
1
2
3
Create an event, and then select it.
DID YOU KNOW
?
If you sync with Microsoft
Select Details.
Outlook and your events include other people,
a With field appears in the Details dialog box
and your attendee info appears in this field
after you sync.
Select the Repeat pick list, and then
select a repeat interval. If the interval
you need doesn’t appear on the list,
148
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Color-coding your schedule
Changing or deleting an event
Use color-coding to quickly spot various
types of events. For example, make
appointments with family green,
coworkers blue, and friends red. Follow
these steps to create a category and
assign it a color code.
1
Select the event you want to edit or
delete.
2
3
Select Details.
In addition to the settings covered
earlier in this chapter, you can also
change any of the following settings:
1
In Day View, select an event description
or select an empty time slot.
Date and Time: Displays when the
event takes place. Change these
settings to reschedule the event.
2
3
Select Details.
Select the Category pick list and select
Edit Categories.
Location: Provides a description of
where the event takes place.
4
Do one of the following:
Category: Sets the color-coded
category for this event.
• To create a new category, select New
and then enter a category name.
Note
: Provides space for you to
• To add a color to an existing category,
select a category and select Edit.
enter additional text.
Delete: Removes the event from your
calendar.
5
6
7
Select the color you want to give this
category, and then select OK.
(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add
or edit more categories.
4
Select OK.
TIP To save memory, you can purge your old
events. Open the Record menu and select
Purge. Select the Delete events older than
pick list and select a time frame. Select OK.
Select OK two more times.
Now that the categories are set up with
colors, you can assign categories to your
events to color-code them. See the next
section for details.
149
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Customizing display options for your
calendar
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Display Options.
3
4
Select the Default View pick list and
select the view you want to see when
you open Calendar.
Select Agenda and set any of the
following options:
5
Select Day and set any of the following
options:
Show Due Tasks: The tasks that are
due today and the tasks that are
overdue appear in Agenda View.
Show Category List: The Category pick
list appears in Day View.
Show Time Bars: The time bars appear
in Day View to show the duration of an
event and to illustrate event conflicts.
Show Messages: The number of read
and unread email messages displays in
Agenda View.
Compress Day View: When this box is
unchecked, all time slots appear on the
screen. When this box is checked, start
and end times appear for each event,
but blank time slots near the bottom of
the screen disappear to minimize
scrolling.
Background: A favorite photo becomes
the Agenda View background. Check
the Background box, select the image
placeholder, and then select a photo.
Adjust the fade setting so that the text
is easy to read against the photo.
Show Category Column: The
color-coded category marker appears
between the time and the description to
150
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
indicate under which category the event
is filed.
7
Select OK.s
TIP You can customize your smartphone to
display the most current Calendar event in the
Main tab in the Phone application. Press
Phone, open the Options menu, and then
select Phone Display Options. Check the
Show Calendar event box.
6
Select Month and set any of the
following options:
Show Category List: The Category pick
list appears in Month View.
Timed Events: The events that are
scheduled for a specific time appear in
Month View.
Selecting alarm tones
1
2
Press Menu
.
Untimed Events: The events that are
scheduled for a specific date but not a
specific time appear in Month View.
Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
3
4
Select the Application pick list and
select Calendar.
Daily Repeating Events: The events
that repeat every day appear in Month
View.
Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
151
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
5
6
Select the Vibrate pick list and select
when you want your smartphone to
vibrate for an event alarm.
TIP You can also record sounds and use them
as alarms. Select Manage on the Sound &
Alerts Preferences screen.
Select tones from any of the following
pick lists:
•
•
To record a sound, select New.
To play a sound, select it and press Center
Alarm Sound: The tone that plays the
first time your alarm goes off.
on the 5-way.
•
•
To delete a sound, select it and press
Backspace.
Reminder Sound: The tone that plays if
an alarm is not acknowledged and
the alarm repeats itself.
To send a sound, select it and then select
Send.
DID YOU KNOW
?
Your Treo includes a silent
Repeat: The number of times the alarm
repeats itself if the alarm is not
acknowledged.
alarm that can vibrate even when the Ringer
switch is set to Sound Off.
Default Alarm: A default amount of
time before the event for which the
alarm goes off.
World Clock
World Clock displays the day and time in
three cities anywhere around the globe.
Whether you’re traveling or staying home,
it’s easy to keep track of the best time to
reach your business associates, friends,
and family in faraway places.
7
Select Done.
152
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Selecting cities
World Clock shows the system date and
time above the world map. If you selected
the option to get the date and time from
the mobile network (see Setting the date
and time), your wireless service provider
network automatically updates the time
display to match the local time when
you travel.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can run your stylus over
TIP If you did not select the option to get the
date and time from the mobile network, then
you can set the city at the top of the screen to
a fixed location.
the map to see the time in other cities. The
shadow over the map represents nighttime
moving across the globe.
TIP World Clock does not automatically update
the system time for daylight savings time. To
change the Daylight Savings Time setting, see
Below the world map, you can view the
time in two other cities. If you travel a lot
you may want to select your home city as
one of these two cities, so that you always
know what time it is at home.
Adding cities
If the city you want to display is not in the
predefined list, you can add it.
1
Press Applications
World Clock
and select
.
1
Select a City pick list and select Edit
List.
2
Select a City pick list, and select a city
in the same time zone.
2
3
Select Add.
Select a location in the same time zone
as the city you want to add, and then
select OK.
153
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
4
5
Enter the name of the city.
Tasks
Select Location, select Map, select the
location of the city, and then select OK.
You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks
you need to complete and to keep a record
of when you finish tasks.
6
If the city is not on Daylight Savings
Time, uncheck this box. If Daylight
Savings Time is observed, enter Start
and End dates.
Adding a task
7
Select OK, and then select Done.
1
Press Applications
Tasks
and select
.
Setting an alarm
2
Select New to create a new task.
The next time you travel, don’t rely on a
hotel alarm clock to get you to that
important meeting. Use your smartphone
instead. World Clock includes a built-in
alarm feature that you can use as a travel
alarm.
1
2
Select Off in the upper-right corner.
Select the time you want the alarm to
sound.
3
Select OK.
3
Enter a description of the task. The text
can be longer than one line.
TIP To customize the alarm sound and volume,
open the Options menu and select Alarm
Preferences.
Setting task priority, due date, and other
details
TIP Make sure the Ringer switch is set to
Sound On, so that you can hear the alarm.
The Details dialog box enables you to
assign a priority level, due date, category,
privacy flag, and other details for each task.
154
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
1
Select the task to which you want to
assign details.
repeating task, the next instance of this
task automatically appears in your task
list.
2
3
Select Details.
Set any of the following:
Private: Check this box to mark this
task private. See Working with private
entries for additional information.
Priority: Select the priority number for
this task (1 is most important). Later
you can arrange your tasks based on the
importance of each task.
: Select this button to enter
additional text that you want to
associate with the task.
TIP You can also select the priority from the
Tasks list by selecting the number next to a
task and then selecting a priority level.
Category: Assign the task to a specific
category.
Due Date: Select the Due Date pick list
and select a due date for the task.
4
Select OK.
TIP If you turn on the Show Due Dates option
in the Tasks Preferences screen, you can
select the due date in the Tasks list to set a
new date.
TIP Press Menu to access other features such
as importing phone numbers into the Tasks
list.
Checking off a task
Alarm: Set an alarm for this task.
1
2
Select the task you want to check off.
Repeat: Indicate whether the task
occurs at regular intervals and how
often it repeats. When you check off a
Press Center
or tap in the box to
check off the task.
155
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Organizing your tasks
In the Tasks list, select one of these
options:
All: Displays all your tasks.
Date: Displays tasks that are due in a
specific time frame. With Date selected,
press Down
then press Center
to select the pick list, and
to see the various
options: Due Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7
Days, or Past Due.
TIP If you accidentally check off a task and
need to uncheck it, highlight the task again
and press Center on the 5-way to uncheck it.
Category: Displays tasks that are assigned
to the selected category. Select the
Category pick list to select a different
category.
TIP You can set Tasks to record the date that
you completed a task, and you can select to
show or hide completed tasks. Completed
tasks remain in the memory of your
smartphone until you purge them.
DID YOU KNOW
?
Overdue tasks have an
exclamation point (!) next to the due date.
156
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
Deleting a task
2
3
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
1
2
3
Select the task you want to delete.
Press Menu
Set any of the following preferences:
.
Sort by: Indicates the order in which
your tasks appear in the list.
Select Delete Task from the Record
menu.
4
Select OK.
Show Completed Tasks: Displays
tasks you’ve checked off.
TIP To save memory, you can purge all
completed tasks. Open the Record menu and
select Purge. Select OK.
Record Completion Date: Replaces
due date with the completion date
when you complete (check off) the task.
Customizing Tasks
Show Due Dates: Displays task due
dates and inserts an exclamation point
(!) next to overdue tasks.
The Tasks Preferences screen enables you
to control the appearance of the Tasks list
screen.
Show Priorities: Displays the priority
setting for each task.
1
In the Tasks list screen, press
Menu
.
Show Categories: Displays the
category for each task.
Alarm Sound: Sets the sound for the
alarms you assign to your tasks.
4
Select OK.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can display your tasks in
your calendar. See Customizing display
options for your calendar for details.
157
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
7
158
CHAPTER
8
Your memos and documents
With its ability to store large amounts of important information, your
Palm® Treo™ 680 smartphone lets you take your office with you—
including your Microsoft Office and PDF files. You can keep updated
copies of the files on both your smartphone and your computer so that
you can work on them in the most convenient location any time.
Leave your note pad and voice recorder at home. Use Memos to type
notes. Use Voice Memo to record notes, agenda items, and other
important thoughts, and play them back, right on your smartphone. You
can even send your notes and voice memos to a friend or colleague by
attaching them to an email or multimedia message.
Benefits
•
Manage Word, Excel, PowerPoint,
and PDF files on your smartphone
•
Capture thoughts on the fly
•
Improve productivity by taking
important docs, spreadsheets, and
presentations with you
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
8
Here are a few more examples of what you
can do with Documents:
Documents To Go
Professional
•
Send and receive email attachments in
Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat
file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
NOTE The Palm Software Installation CD
includes the Documents To Go® desktop
software. On your smartphone, the
companion for Documents To Go is named
Documents and it’s already installed on
your smartphone.
•
•
View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and
Acrobat files (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
Create or edit a Word-compatible
document or Excel-compatible
spreadsheet on your smartphone, and
then save it in the native DOC or XLS
format.
With the Documents application, you can
take your important office info with you.
You can carry, create, view, and edit
Microsoft Word and Excel files directly on
your smartphone. You can also view, carry,
and manage PowerPoint and PDF files. For
example, you can open email attachments,
files you download with the web browser,
and files stored on an expansion card—as
long as the files are in a supported format.
•
Create a PowerPoint presentation on
your computer, use the Documents To
Go desktop application to optimize the
file for your smartphone, and then sync
the file onto your smartphone to view it
on the go.
NOTE The Documents application does
not support some editing functions, such
as multiple font sizes and spell checking.
If you install the Documents To Go desktop
software (from the Palm Software
Installation CD), you can use Documents
To Go to transfer files from your computer
to your smartphone when you synchronize.
161
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
8
2
Select the document you want from the
list.
TIP For more info on the Documents To Go
application on your smartphone, go to
www.dataviz.com. If you installed the desktop
application from the Palm Software
Installation CD, you can also click the
Documents To Go icon on your computer,
and then click Help.
TIP When you work on a file on your
smartphone, you can save it to your
smartphone or an expansion card. Open the
File menu, select Save As, and then select
the location where you want to save the file.
TIP Install the Files application from the Palm
Software Installation CD to easily browse and
manage files on an expansion card.
Memos
Opening a document
Memos are a great way to store notes on
your Treo 680.
In the Documents application, you can
view and open any Word, Excel,
PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your
smartphone or an expansion card that is
inserted in the expansion slot.
DID YOU KNOW Each memo can include 4,096
characters of text.
?
1
Press Applications
Documents
and select
Creating a memo
.
1
2
3
Press Applications
Memos
and select
.
Enter the text you want to appear in the
memo.
Select Done.
162
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
8
important thoughts directly on your
smartphone.
Creating a voice memo
When recording a voice memo, hold your
smartphone with the screen facing
towards you while speaking.
1
2
Press and hold the Side button on your
smartphone while recording your
memo. After you finish recording,
release the Side button.
TIP You can assign categories to your memos.
Open the memo you want to change, select
the category pick list at the top of the screen,
and select a category.
The memo is automatically saved to
your smartphone.
(Optional) Enter a title for the memo.
Deleting a memo
1
2
3
Open the memo you want to delete.
Press Menu
TIP You can also access Voice Memo, by
pressing Applications and selecting Voice
Memo.
.
Select Delete Memo from the Record
menu.
TIP If you need to pause while recording,
press and hold Center on the 5-way. Release
the button to resume recording.
4
Select OK.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can use a voice memo as
a ringtone. Highlight the voice memo in the
list, open the Voice Memo menu, and then
select Copy to Ringtone.
Voice Memo
Voice Memo provides a place for you to
record and play back notes and other
163
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
8
Listening to a voice memo
TIP To adjust the volume level, press the
Volume button on the side of your
smartphone.
1
Press Applications
Voice Memo
and select
.
2
In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the
voice memo title and then press
TIP To change a voice memo title, open the
Voice Memo menu and select Rename
Memo.
Center
to select it. The voice
memo begins to play.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can send a voice memo in
an email or MMS message (see the
documentation for your email application, or
You can also use Bluetooth® wireless
technology to send a voice memo to a nearby
Bluetooth device (see Sending info over a
3
Press Center
to pause or stop
playback.
164
CHAPTER
9
Your application and
info management tools
Synchronization is a great way to transfer, update, and back up
info on your Palm® Treo™ 680 smartphone. Synchronizing
simply means that info you entered or updated in one place
(your Treo or your computer) is automatically updated in the
other. There’s no need to enter info twice.
Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and
limitless storage solution. When one card becomes full, simply
use another card to carry your extra music and video clips and
to install and run cool games and other software, from
dictionaries to travel guides.
Benefits
•
Locate info in your applications
with the Find feature
•
•
Quickly enter, update, and protect
your info on your computer and
your Treo
•
Install applications, games, and
other software
Store, carry, and exchange info
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
Using Find
The Find feature locates any text in the
built-in applications and databases and
in some third-party applications. The Find
feature searches for the group of
characters you specify, including characters
that are part of a word. Find is not
case-sensitive.
Viewing and using
the alerts
DID YOU KNOW Find locates any word that
?
begins with the text you enter. For example,
entering “plane” finds “planet,” but not
“airplane.”
The Alert dialog box on your smartphone
shows info about incoming items, such as
new email messages and Calendar events.
An alert also notifies you when you miss a
phone call.
1
Press Option
Find to open the Find dialog box.
, and then press Shift/
2
3
4
Enter the text you want to find.
Select OK to start the search.
To view the Alert dialog box, tap the
In the search results, select the text you
want to review, or select Find More to
continue the search.
blinking bell
with your stylus when it
appears in the upper-left corner of any
screen, or press and hold Center
when the blinking bell appears.
167
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
In the Alert dialog box, you can do any of
the following:
3
Select Options, and then select
Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.
•
Check the box next to the alert to
remove it from the list.
•
Select the alert to open the
corresponding application and view the
alert item (message, event, missed call,
and so on).
•
•
Select Done to close the Alert dialog
box. The alert remains active and the
bell continues to blink in the upper-left
corner of the screen.
Select Clear All to delete all alerts in
the Alert dialog box.
Calculator
Calculator includes a basic calculator, plus
an advanced calculator with scientific,
financial, and conversion functions.
TIP In Basic Mode, you can also press Right
on the 5-way to switch to Advanced Mode. In
Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way to
cycle between functions, and press Left on
the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.
Switching between Basic and Advanced
Calculator Modes
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can tap the onscreen
1
Press Applications
and select Calc
number pad or use the keyboard to input
numbers.
.
2
Press Menu
.
168
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
Selecting functions in Advanced
Calculator Mode
Length: Length conversions for metric
and English values.
1
Switch to Advanced Mode (see the
preceding procedure).
Area: Area conversions for metric,
traditional, and English values.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Volume: Volume conversions for metric
and English values.
Select Options, and then select the
type of function you want to use:
4
5
Press Menu
.
Math: Advanced mathematical
functions such as exponents, roots, and
logarithms.
Select Pref, and then select the decimal
display format: Float, Fixed(x), Sci(x),
or Eng(x).
Trig: Trigonometric functions such as
sine, cosine, tangent, and variants.
6
7
Press Menu
.
Select Pref, and then select the number
display format: Degrees, Radians, or
Grads.
Finance: Financial calculator functions
such as APR and amortization.
Logic: Hexadecimal characters in
keypad, plus logic functions such as
And, Not, Or, and Xor.
TIP Select Sto to store a number in one of ten
memory slots. Select Rcl to recall a stored
number.
Statistics: Statistical functions such as
sum, factorial, and random number
generator.
TIP Select Con to access a list of
mathematical constants such as Avogadro’s
number or the speed of light.
Weight/Tmp: Weight and temperature
conversions for metric and English
values.
169
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
install the desktop software, or you can
install them later.
Installing applications
1
Insert the Palm Software Installation CD
into the CD drive on your computer.
Your Treo 680 comes with several built-in
and ready-to-use applications. You can also
install additional applications, such as
business software, games, and more. The
Palm Software Installation CD includes
several bonus software apps, and you can
purchase other third-party Palm OS® apps
as well. To learn about applications you can
add to your Treo 680, go to
2
3
Click Install bonus software.
Click the name of the application you
want to install.
4
5
6
Click Install (on the right side of the
screen).
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install additional
applications.
Synchronize your smartphone with your
computer to install the application(s) on
your Treo.
NOTE The instructions in this section tell
you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS
application) and PDB (Palm OS database)
files on your Treo. Some Palm OS software
uses an installer or wizard to guide you
through the process. For details, consult
the documentation that came with the
software.
Installing applications from the Internet
You can use the web browser on your Treo
to install Palm OS files (PRC or PDB)
directly from the Internet. When you
download a PRC or PDB file, it is
automatically installed on your Treo. If a file
is compressed (ZIP or SIT files), you need
to download it to your computer, expand
the file, and then synchronize to transfer
the expanded file to your Treo.
Installing bonus software from the CD
The Palm Software Installation CD includes
several bonus software applications that
you can install on your smartphone. You
can install these applications when you
170
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
1
2
3
Open the web browser (see Viewing a
web page).
1
Windows: Drag and drop the file(s)
onto the Palm Quick Install icon on the
Windows desktop.
Go to the page that contains the link to
the application you want to download.
Mac: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the
Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm
folder.
Press Left or Right to highlight the
link to the file, and then press Center
to initiate the download process.
4
Follow the onscreen instructions to
accept and install the application.
Installing applications from a computer
2
3
Select your device name from the User
list, and then click OK.
When you download an application to your
computer, it is probably in a compressed
format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is
compressed, you need to use a
decompression utility on your computer,
such as WinZip or Allume Stuffit Expander,
before you install the application on your
Treo.
Synchronize your Treo with your
computer to install the application(s) on
your Treo 680.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an app
from your computer to your Treo, you must
first install Palm® Desktop software on
your computer (see Installing the desktop
171
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
Removing
applications
TIP Want to install an app to an expansion card
rather than your smartphone?
Windows: Open Palm® Quick Install and drag
the file to the Expansion Card pane.
If you decide that you no longer need an
application, or you want to free up
memory, you can remove apps from your
Treo or an expansion card (for more on
expansion cards, see Inserting an
apps, patches, and extensions that you
install; you cannot remove the built-in apps
that reside in the ROM portion of your Treo.
Applications that you cannot remove
appear with a Lock icon next to them.
Mac: In the menu for Palm Desktop software,
click HotSync, select Install Handheld files,
and select expansion card as the file’s
destination.
TIP On a Windows computer, you can also
access Palm Quick Install by selecting the
Quick Install icon in Palm Desktop software
or from the Programs folder in the Start
menu.
Getting help with third-party applications
If you encounter a problem (such as an
error message) with a third-party
application, contact the application’s author
or vendor. For general troubleshooting of
third-party applications, see Third-party
DID YOU KNOW Applications deleted from your
?
smartphone are kept on your computer in the
Archive folder of your user folder. If you have
trouble locating your user folder, see I can’t
1
2
Press Applications
.
If you want to remove an application
from an expansion card, insert the card
into your Treo.
172
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
3
4
5
Press Menu
.
If you upgraded from a previous version
of Palm Desktop, your Backup subfolder
may be located in the palmOne or
Handspring folder.
Select Delete on the App menu.
Select the Delete From pick list and
select the location of the application you
want to remove: Phone or <card
name>.
2
3
If you find a PRC or PDB file for the
application you just removed, delete the
file from the Backup subfolder.
6
Select the application that you want to
remove.
Delete the file from your device again.
7
8
Select Delete.
Synchronize to remove the application
from the Backup subfolder on your
computer.
Viewing application
info
Manually deleting applications
The Info screens display basic statistics
about the applications on your Treo.
If an app you delete reappears on your
smartphone, you may need to manually
delete the app from your computer.
1
2
3
4
Press Applications
Press Menu
.
1
Locate your Backup subfolder on your
.
computer.
Select Info on the App menu.
Windows: C:\Program
Files\Palm\<device name>.
Select the Device pick list and select
the location of the app you want to view
info for: Phone or <card name>.
Mac: Mac
HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<device
name>.
173
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
5
At the bottom of the screen, select the
type of information you want to view:
Sending information
with Bluetooth
wireless technology
The range of Bluetooth® wireless
technology is up to 30 feet in optimum
environmental conditions. Performance
and range may be affected by physical
obstacles, radio interference from nearby
electronic equipment, and other factors.
Version: The version numbers of
applications on your Treo 680.
TIP Check your battery level before
Size: The size (in kilobytes) of
applications and information on your
Treo 680.
establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection.
If the battery level is very low, you can’t make
a Bluetooth wireless connection.
Records: The number of entries in
various applications on your Treo 680.
Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
6
7
Scroll to the application you want to see
info about.
In most applications, you can send an
individual entry or item such as a contact or
a picture. You can also send all the entries
in a category, such as all contacts in the
Business category.
Select Done.
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
and select
.
174
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
2
3
4
Select Bluetooth On.
7
Select the application you want to
transfer. You cannot send an item that
Open an application.
has a lock
next to it.
Select the entry or category you want to
send. You cannot send an item that has
8
9
Select Send.
a lock
next to it.
Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
5
6
7
8
Press Menu
.
10 Select the receiving device(s) from the
Discovery Results list, and then select
OK.
Select Send from the leftmost menu.
Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
11 Wait for a message to indicate that the
transfer is complete before you
continue using your Treo.
Select the receiving device(s) from the
Discovery Results list, and then select
OK.
9
Wait for a message to indicate that the
transfer is complete before you
continue using your Treo.
Receiving info over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
Select Bluetooth On.
and select
.
Sending an app over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
2
3
Select the Visibility pick list and select
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
and select
one of the following:
.
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that
are not on your Trusted Devices list to
request a connection with your
smartphone. Your smartphone remains
accessible to other devices until you
turn this option off. After you’re done
using this setting, remember to change
it back to Hidden.
2
3
4
5
6
Select Bluetooth On.
Press Applications
.
Press Menu
.
Select Send from the App menu.
Select the Send From pick list and
select the location of the app you want
to send: Phone or <card name>.
175
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices
that are not on your Trusted Devices list
to request a connection with your
smartphone during the next two
minutes. Your smartphone reverts to
the Hidden setting and becomes
TIP The Device Name in the Bluetooth app is
the name other devices with Bluetooth
wireless technology see when they connect
to your smartphone. The default name is the
name you gave your device during setup. You
can change this name if you want to.
inaccessible to other devices after two
minutes.
DID YOU KNOW
?
When you receive an
application over a Bluetooth connection, you
can store the application on your smartphone
or send it to an expansion card inserted into
the expansion card slot.
4
Use the other device to discover your
Treo 680 and send information to it:
• See the other device’s documentation
to learn how to discover and send
information over a Bluetooth wireless
connection.
Beaming information
• If the Ringer switch is set to Sound
On, your Treo beeps to notify you of
the connection and then prompts you
to accept the info. Select a category
or expansion card to file the item(s). If
you don’t select a category, the
Your Treo 680 is equipped with an IR
(infrared) port so that you can beam
information to another device with an IR
port—provided the other device supports
IR communications with Palm OS devices.
The IR port is located on the top of your
Treo 680, next to the Ringer switch, behind
the small dark shield.
item(s) goes into the Unfiled category.
5
Select Yes to receive the information or
No to refuse it.
176
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
Beam Category: Sends all entries in
the current category.
TIP For best results, the path between the
two devices must be clear of obstacles, and
both devices must be stationary. If you have
difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and
avoid bright sunlight.
DID YOU KNOW
?
If you beam a bookmark or
saved page from the web browser, it beams
the URL, not the contents of that page.
Beaming an entry
5
6
When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, point the IR port on your Treo
directly at the IR port of the receiving
device.
You can beam an individual entry or item
such as a contact or a picture. You can also
beam all the entries in the selected
category, such as all the contacts in the
Business or Family category.
Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to
indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue using your Treo.
TIP Beam your business card in two key
presses: From the Main tab in the Phone
application, press Menu, and then press M.
1
2
Open the application that holds the
entry you want to beam.
Select the entry or category you want to
beam. You cannot beam an item that
has a lock
next to it.
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Record, and then select one of
the following:
Beam: Sends an individual record.
177
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
Beaming an application
Receiving beamed information
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure that the
Not all applications can be beamed. A lock
icon appears on the Beam screen next Beam Receive option in Power
to applications that cannot be beamed.
settings for details.
1
2
3
4
Press Applications
Press Menu
.
.
1
2
Turn on your screen.
Select Beam from the App menu.
Select the beam command on the
transmitting device.
Select the Beam From pick list and
select the location of the application you
want to beam: Phone or <card name>.
3
Point the IR port on your Treo directly at
the IR port of the transmitting device
to open the Beam Status dialog box.
5
Select the application you want to
transfer.
4
5
When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, select a category for the entry.
6
7
Select Beam.
When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, point the IR port on your Treo
directly at the IR port of the receiving
device.
Select Ye s to receive the information or
No to refuse it.
TIP If you do not select a category upon
receiving a beamed item, the item is placed in
the Unfiled category.
8
Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to
indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue using your Treo.
TIP If you can’t receive beamed info, make
sure that you are not running a third-party app
that disables beaming. If you still can’t receive
a beam, try a soft reset (see Resetting your
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can store a beamed app
on your smartphone or send it to an expansion
card inserted into the expansion card slot.
178
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
WINDOWS ONLY
Synchronizing
information—
advanced
1
Click HotSync® manager
in the
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your
screen.
2
3
Select Custom.
Select your device name from the User
Changing which applications sync
list at the top of the screen.
By default, information from Calendar,
Contacts, Memos, Pictures & Videos, and
Tasks is updated each time you
synchronize your smartphone. You can
change which applications synchronize. For
example, if you don’t use the Memos
application and you want to speed up
synchronization, you can turn off
4
5
Select the application for which you
want to turn synchronization on or off,
and then click Change.
Select Synchronize the files to turn on
synchronization for an app.
Select Do nothing to turn off
synchronization for an app that currently
synchronizes (for example, to turn off
synchronization for Memos if you do not
use this app).
synchronization for Memos.
TIP Windows If you set up your smartphone
to sync with Outlook, you can learn how to
change which applications synchronize, by
doing the following: Click the HotSync
manager icon in the taskbar and select
Custom. Select a conduit that syncs with
Outlook, click Change, and then click Help.
179
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
NOTE If you want the information in one
location (smartphone or computer) to
completely replace the information in the
other location for that app, select one of
the two overwrite options. For example, if
the Calendar info on your smartphone is
accurate but the info on your computer has
become corrupted, select Handheld
overwrites Desktop for the Calendar app
to have your smartphone info replace your
computer info. Note that “handheld” refers
to your smartphone and “desktop” refers
to your computer.
MAC ONLY
1
2
3
4
Double-click the Palm Desktop
in the Palm folder.
icon
From the HotSync menu, select
Conduit Settings.
From the User pop-up menu, select
your device name.
Select the application for which you
want to turn synchronization on or off,
and then click Conduit Settings.
5
Select Synchronize the files to turn on
synchronization for an app.
Select Do nothing to turn off
synchronization for an app that currently
synchronizes (for example, to turn off
synchronization for Memos if you do not
use this app).
6
(Optional) If you want to make this
change permanent, check the Set as
default box. Otherwise, your change
affects only one synchronization (the
next one you do); thereafter, the
synchronization action reverts to what it
was before the change.
7
8
Click OK.
(Optional) To turn synchronization on or
off for other apps, repeat steps 4, 5, 6,
and 7 for each application you want to
change.
9
Click Done.
180
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
NOTE If you want the information in one
location (smartphone or computer) to
completely replace the information in the
other location for that app, select one of
the two overwrite options. For example, if
the Calendar info on your smartphone is
accurate but the info on your Mac has
become corrupted, select Handheld
overwrites Macintosh for the Calendar
app to have your smartphone info replace
the info on your Mac. Note that
Setting up a Bluetooth connection for
synchronization
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can synchronize
wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection.
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
Select Bluetooth On.
and select
.
2
“handheld” refers to your smartphone.
6
(Optional) If you want to make this
change permanent, click Make Default.
Otherwise, your change affects only
one synchronization (the next one you
do); thereafter, the synchronization
action reverts to what it was before the
change.
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your Treo 680 when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
7
8
Click OK.
(Optional) To turn synchronization on or
off for other apps, repeat steps 4, 5, 6,
and 7 for each application you want to
change.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to recreate any
partnerships you already created.
9
Close the Conduit Settings window.
4
Select the Visibility pick list and select
Visible or Temporary.
181
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
8
After you finish the HotSync setup,
select Done to return to Applications
View.
TIP After you form a partnership with a device,
you can change the Visibility setting back to
Hidden. That way only devices with which
0
you’ve already formed a partnership can find
your smartphone. New devices cannot
request a connection.
You’re now ready to sync your Treo 680
with your Bluetooth computer.
Synchronizing over a Bluetooth
connection
5
6
Select Setup Devices.
Select HotSync Setup.
When you synchronize using the Bluetooth
wireless feature on your Treo, you don’t
need your sync cable. This is especially
useful if you travel with a laptop enabled
with Bluetooth wireless technology.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Verify the following
on your computer:
•
It includes built-in Bluetooth wireless
technology or a Bluetooth adapter.
•
•
Bluetooth is turned on.
7
Follow the onscreen instructions to
create a partnership between your
smartphone and your computer.
In some cases you may need to
perform setup steps on your computer
before you can complete this step.
Check your computer’s documentation
for specific setup instructions.
HotSync manager is active. On a
Windows computer, you know HotSync
manager is active when its icon appears
in the lower-right corner of your screen.
182
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
1
Press Applications
and select
Synchronizing over an infrared
connection
HotSync
.
When you synchronize using the IR port on
your Treo, you don’t need your sync cable.
This is especially useful if you travel with
an IR-enabled laptop.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your computer must
include the following items:
•
An enabled IR port and driver or an IR
device attached to it. Check your
computer’s documentation to see if it
supports IR communication.
2
3
Select Local.
Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon, and then select the name of the
PC you set up for Bluetooth
synchronization (see Setting up a
•
HotSync manager must be active. On a
Windows computer, you know HotSync
manager is active when its icon appears
in the lower-right corner of your screen.
WINDOWS ONLY
On your computer, click HotSync
manager in the taskbar in the
4
Select the HotSync
smartphone.
icon on your
1
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your
smartphone screen. Be patient;
lower-right corner of your screen. Make
sure that Infrared is selected.
synchronization may take a few minutes.
183
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
MAC ONLY
1
2
3
4
5
Double-click the HotSync manager
icon in the Palm folder.
Click the HotSync Controls tab, and
then select Enabled.
Click the Connection Settings tab, and
then check the On box next to IR port.
Close the HotSync Software Setup
window.
2
On your smartphone, press
Applications and select
On your smartphone, press
Applications
and select
HotSync
.
HotSync
.
3
4
Select Local.
6
7
Select Local.
Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
5
6
Position the IR port on your Treo within
a few inches of your computer’s IR port.
8
9
Position the IR port on your Treo within
a few inches of your Mac’s IR port.
Select the HotSync
icon on your
Select the HotSync
icon on your
smartphone.
smartphone.
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your
smartphone screen. Be patient;
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your
smartphone screen. Be patient;
synchronization may take a few minutes.
synchronization may take a few minutes.
184
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
Your Treo 680 is also compatible with SDIO
cards, which you can use to add
accessories, such as an FM radio module,
to your Treo.
Using expansion
cards
IMPORTANT When using an SDIO card,
the SDIO card may protrude from the side
of your Treo 680 and prevent you from
closing the door of the expansion card slot.
Be careful not to damage the door.
Additionally, some SDIO cards may be too
wide to fit inside the expansion door
opening, so make sure the SDIO card fits
inside the expansion door opening before
making your purchase.
The expansion card slot on your Treo 680
enables you to add SD cards and
MultiMediaCard cards to extend the
storage capacity of your Treo 680
(expansion cards sold separately). Here are
some examples of what SD and
MultiMediaCard expansion cards can store:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Photos
MP3 audio files
Email attachments
Games
Inserting an expansion card
1
Open the expansion slot door.
eBooks
Microsoft Office files
Adobe Acrobat files
Applications
Databases
TIP SD cards are faster than MultiMediaCard
cards for reading and writing information, and
SD cards also offer write-protection.
185
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
2
3
Hold your Treo with the screen facing
you, and hold the card with the label
facing you. The notch on the card should
be in the upper corner closest to the
screen.
Removing an expansion card
1
2
Open the expansion slot door.
Press the card into the expansion slot to
release it from the expansion slot.
3
After you feel the expansion card slot
eject the card, remove the card
from the slot.
Insert the card into the expansion card
slot until you feel it lock into place.
TIP The expansion card slot has a push-push
mechanism: push in gently to insert a card;
push in gently to remove it.
TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On,
you hear a confirmation tone when you insert
or remove an expansion card.
4
Close the expansion slot door.
Notch
Opening applications on an expansion
card
After you insert an expansion card into the
expansion card slot, you can open any of
the applications stored on the expansion
card.
4
Close the expansion slot door.
1
Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. The Card category
186
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
of Applications View automatically
appears.
1
Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. The Card category
of Applications View automatically
appears.
2
3
Select the category pick list in the title
bar, and select All.
Select the icon for the application in
which you want to open the item. For
example, to view a picture, select
Pics&Videos.
Copying applications between an
expansion card and your Treo
2
3
Select the icon for the application you
want to open.
You can copy applications from your Treo to
your expansion card and vice versa.
Press Center
to open the
application.
TIP Install the Files application from the Palm
Software Installation CD to easily browse and
manage files on an expansion card.
TIP Before you copy an application to an
expansion card, make sure that it is
compatible with Palm OS software version
5.4.5 or later. Some applications do not work
with expansion cards and do not allow you to
store files in a location that is separate from
the application.
Accessing items stored on an expansion
card
When an expansion card contains items
such as pictures or songs, you can’t view
them directly from the Card category in
Applications View. You must open the app
that recognizes the item.
187
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
1
Press Applications
.
Viewing expansion card information
2
3
4
Press Menu
.
The Card Info application displays general
information about the expansion card that
is currently in the expansion slot, and it
enables you to rename and format a card.
Select Copy from the App menu.
Select the Copy To pick list and select
the destination: Phone or <card
name>.
•
Press Applications
Card Info
and select
.
5
Select the From pick list and select the
location of the application you want to
copy: Phone or <card name>.
Renaming an expansion card
If you change the contents of an expansion
card, you may at some point want to
rename the card to better match its
contents.
6
7
Highlight the application you want to
copy.
Select Copy.
1
Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot.
2
Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select All.
188
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
3
4
5
Select Card Info
Press Menu
.
TIP If you format a card, any photos or
.
documents that were previously stored on the
card are deleted from your desktop software
the next time you sync. You can recover these
files from the backup folder, or you can
prevent the deletion by temporarily changing
your sync settings for the affected application
to Desktop overwrites handheld.
Select Rename Card from the Card
menu.
6
7
Enter a new name for the card.
Select OK.
TIP If you have trouble copying info to,
renaming, or formatting an expansion card,
make sure the card is not write-protected.
Press Applications and select Card Info. If a
This card is read-only message appears, then
the card is write-protected. If you’re using an
SD card, you can slide the write-protect tab to
the opposite position to write to the card. See
the instructions that came with your card for
additional info.
1
2
Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot.
Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select All.
3
4
5
Select Card Info
Press Menu
.
.
Select Format Card from the Card
menu.
Formatting an expansion card
6
7
Enter a new name for the card.
Formatting an expansion card is similar to
formatting a disk on a computer. When
you format an expansion card, you erase all
the information stored on the card.
Select OK.
189
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
9
190
CHAPTER
10
Your personal settings
Customizing your Palm® Treo™ 680 smartphone is great way to
make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you.
On your Treo, you can easily customize the sounds, fonts,
screen colors, and more. Take advantage of different levels of
security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive) phone
call by locking the keyboard. Some settings can help extend the
life of your Treo battery. There are lots of ways to make your
Treo work better for you.
Benefits
•
Access applications quickly
•
•
Conserve power
•
Make your screen easy to read
Enjoy your smartphone more
In this chapter
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
System sound
settings
Silencing sounds
Sound Off
Sound On
You can immediately silence all alerts,
ringtones, music that plays through the
built-in speaker, and system sounds by
sliding the Ringer switch to the Sound Off
position. This does not mute the audio
during a phone call.
Setting system volume levels
You can set the volume level for system
sounds, such as the tone that plays when
you synchronize.
1
Slide the Ringer switch to the Sound
Off position. Your smartphone
TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off,
the ringer setting overrides the sound settings
and all sounds are turned off.
vibrates once to let you know that
you’ve turned sounds off.
2
To hear all sounds again, slide the
Ringer switch to the Sound On
position.
1
2
Press Applications
Sounds
and select
.
Select the Application pick list and
select System.
NOTE For info on setting the vibrate option,
see the section on setting alert tones in the
chapters that describe the individual applications.
When you slide the Ringer switch back to
the Sound On position, it restores the
previous sound settings.
193
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
3
Select the System Volume and Game
Volume pick lists and select the volume
levels.
Backlight
2
3
Press Left and Right to adjust the
brightness.
Select Done.
TIP To temporarily set the backlight to the
preset low setting, press Option + Menu.
4
Select Done.
TIP You can also adjust the backlight and set
the brightness duration during a call in Power
Display and
Changing the screen font
appearance settings
You can change the screen font in
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Messaging,
Tasks, and Web. The font styles may vary
between applications and some
Adjusting the brightness
Depending on the lighting conditions in
which you’re using your Treo, you may
need to adjust the brightness of the screen
and keyboard backlight.
applications may offer fewer choices.
1
Open the application in which you want
to change the font.
1
Press Option
, and then press
2
3
Press Menu
.
Backlight
.
Select Options, and then select Font.
194
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
4
Select a font style. (In the web browser,
select the Font size pick list and select
Large or Small.)
3 Set any of the following preferences:
Preset to: The standard number
conventions for your country. When you
select a country, the other Formats
Preferences are automatically set to
that country’s conventions. You can also
edit each option individually.
Small font
Large font
Small bold font
Large bold font
5
Select OK.
Setting display formats
Formats Preferences enable you to select
number conventions based on geographic
regions. For example, in the United
Kingdom, time often is expressed using a
24-hour clock. In the United States, time is
expressed using a 12-hour clock with an
AM or a PM suffix. Many of the built-in
applications on your Treo 680 use the
Formats Preferences settings.
Time: The time format. Select HH:MM
to display a 24-hour clock.
Date: The date format.
Week starts: The first day of the week
(usually Sunday or Monday).
Numbers: The format for numbers with
decimal points and commas.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Formats.
and select
.
4
Select Done.
2
195
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Aligning the screen to correct tapping
problems
Changing the system color scheme
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Color Theme.
and select
Occasionally, your Treo screen may need to
be readjusted. If this problem occurs, you
may see the wrong feature being activated
when you tap the screen. To fix the
problem, you can align the screen at any
time.
.
2
3
Select a color scheme from the list.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Touchscreen.
and select
.
2
3
Follow the onscreen instructions and
tap the screen where indicated.
4
Select Done.
TIP You can also set the wallpaper for the
Main tab in the Phone application (see
application) and the background for Calendar
Agenda View (see Customizing display
4
Select Done.
196
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Applications settings
TIP To create a new category, select the
category pick list and select Edit Categories.
Select New, and then enter the category
name. Select OK to close the dialog box, and
then select OK.
You can change the Applications settings
on your Treo so that you can easily access
the applications you use most often.
You can arrange and display your
applications by category, reassign
the buttons on your Treo, and select default
applications for specific tasks.
DID YOU KNOW
?
If there is an expansion card in
the expansion slot, the card appears in the
category pick list and is treated as a category
when you press Applications repeatedly.
Displaying applications by category
Arranging applications by category
Do one of the following:
You can assign an application to a category
and then display a specific category of
applications in Applications View.
•
Press Applications
repeatedly to
cycle through the categories.
•
Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select a category.
Select All to display all of your
applications.
1
2
3
4
Press Applications
Press Menu
.
.
Select Category on the App menu.
Select the pick list next to each
application and select a category.
Changing Applications View
By default, Applications View displays each
application as an icon. As an alternative,
you can view a list of applications. The list
view is particularly useful when you have
so many applications in a category that the
applications fill up more than one screen.
5
Select Done.
197
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
1
2
3
Press Applications
Press Menu
.
3
Select the pick list next to the item you
want to reassign, and then select an
application.
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
4
5
Select the View By pick list and select
List.
Select OK.
Reassigning buttons
With Buttons Preferences, you can select
which applications are associated with the
quick buttons and the Side button on your
Treo. You can assign a primary and
4
Select Done.
secondary application to each of the three
quick buttons that open an application.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can also choose an
application to open with the sync button on
the USB sync cable. To change this setting,
select HotSync on the Buttons Preferences
screen.
NOTE We recommend that you keep the
primary button assignments on the factory
settings until you become comfortable with
the features of your smartphone. If you do
change the primary button assignments,
remember that the instructions in this
guide and in the other help features refer to
the original button settings.
TIP To restore all the buttons and key
combinations to their factory settings, select
Default.
DID YOU KNOW
?
Some third-party applications
automatically take over a button when you
install the application.
1
2
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Buttons.
and select
.
198
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Changing default applications
4
Select Done.
Sometimes one application looks for
another application to handle information
(for example, a mail application might open
a browser when you select a link in an
email message). Your smartphone comes
with a set of predefined applications to
handle email, messaging, and browser
requests from other applications. If you
have more than one application to handle
these requests on your smartphone, you
can specify which application you want to
use for each function.
Locking your Treo and
info
Your Treo includes several features to
protect your smartphone from inadvertent
use and keep your information private. You
can lock any of the following features on
your smartphone:
Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the
Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard
and all buttons to prevent accidental
presses in your bag or pocket.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Default Apps.
and select
.
2
3
Select each pick list and select the
application you want to associate with
that function.
Screen: You can disable the screen’s
touch-sensitive feature during an active call
or call alert.
Phone (Phone Lock): You can set your
phone to require a password to make calls.
The built-in security software lets you
make emergency calls even if your phone
is locked.
199
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Treo: You can set your Treo to require a
password for you to see any information on
your Treo.
2
Press Center
to turn off Keyguard.
Entries: You can mask or hide entries
marked as private and set your smartphone
to require a password for viewing them.
Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)
The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so
that you don’t accidentally press buttons or
activate items on the screen while your
smartphone is in a pocket or bag.
You can change how quickly Keyguard turns
on, or you can disable this feature
altogether. To change the Keyguard
settings, do the following:
By default, Keyguard turns on whenever
the screen is off. Each time you wake up
the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to
unlock the keyboard and use your
smartphone.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Keyguard.
and select
.
2
3
Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and
To turn off Keyguard, do the following:
then do one of the following:
1
When the screen is off, press Power/
End to wake up the screen.
• Select how quickly you want Keyguard
to turn on: When power is turned
off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30
seconds after power off.
• Select Disable to completely disable
the Keyguard feature until you turn it
on again by pressing Option
+
200
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Power/End
when the screen is
4
Select Done.
on.
DID YOU KNOW
?
When you check the boxes to
4
Select Done.
disable the touchscreen during a call, the
touchscreen is automatically enabled again
after you end the call.
Locking your screen
You can set your smartphone to
automatically lock the screen’s
touch-sensitive features in certain
situations.
Locking your phone (Phone Lock)
You can lock your SIM card to prevent
unauthorized calls and use of other
wireless features. When your SIM card is
locked, you must enter the correct PIN
code to unlock it, even if you move it to a
different phone. You can still make
emergency calls when your phone is
locked, however.
1
Press Applications
and select Prefs
.
2
3
Select Keyguard.
Check any of the following boxes:
Incoming calls received: Disables the
screen when the phone rings. You must
IMPORTANT If your SIM card is locked
and you enter the wrong PIN more than
three times, you must call your wireless
service provider for your unique PIN unlock
key (PUK) to unlock your SIM card.
use the 5-way
onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons, or
press Send
or Power/End
call.
to select the
to answer the call
to ignore the
On a call: Disables the screen after you
answer a call. You must use the 5-way
to select the onscreen buttons
during the call. Use this setting to avoid
accidentally pressing onscreen buttons
while you’re holding your smartphone
near your ear to speak.
TIP When Phone Lock is turned on, other
people can still see the info on your
smartphone, but they cannot make or receive
phone calls or use the other wireless features
without your password.
201
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
TIP To manage your FDN list, press
Applications select SIM Book, press Menu,
and then select Modify FDN from the
Options menu.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Phone
Lock.
4
5
Check the Lock SIM box.
Your SIM card locks again when you turn
off your smartphone and then turn it back
on.
When prompted, enter the current PIN
and select OK. (Unless you changed
your PIN, enter the default PIN,
provided with your wireless service
provider’s account materials.)
To disable the current Phone Lock settings:
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
6
7
If you want to change the PIN, select
Change PIN, enter a new PIN, and then
select OK. Repeat this step to verify the
new PIN.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Phone
Lock.
4
5
6
Uncheck the Lock SIM box.
Enter your PIN code.
Select OK.
If your SIM card supports fixed number
dialing (FDN), select Advanced and
check the Enable Fixed Number
Dialing box to restrict dialing to the
numbers in your FDN list. When
prompted, enter your PIN2 and then
select OK.
Locking your Treo
To protect your personal information, you
can lock your Treo 680 so that you need to
enter your password to access any of your
information or use any of the features on
your Treo, including the phone. You can,
however, still make emergency calls when
your Treo is locked.
8
9
Turn your phone off to activate the
phone lock feature.
To turn your phone on again, press and
hold Power/End
, enter your
PIN, and then select OK to unlock your
smartphone.
202
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
IMPORTANT If you lock your Treo, you
must enter the exact password to unlock it.
If you forget the password, you need to
perform a hard reset to resume using your
Treo. Performing a hard reset deletes all
the entries in your Treo. If you use
password protection in Palm Desktop
software, you must remember your
password to restore your info. However, if
you do not use password protection in
Palm Desktop software, you can restore all
previously synchronized info the next time
4
5
Select the Auto Lock Device box.
When prompted, enter your password
and select OK.
6
Select one of the following options:
Never: Prevents your Treo from locking
automatically.
1
2
Press Applications
Security
and select
.
On power off: Locks your Treo when
you turn off the screen, or when it
shuts off with the Auto-off feature.
Select the Password box.
At a preset time: Locks your Treo at a
specific time of day.
After a preset delay: Locks your Treo
after a period of inactivity.
7
8
Select OK.
Do one of the following:
• Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your
Treo immediately.
3
Assign a password and a password hint.
203
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
• Press Applications
to accept
After you enable the mask or hide setting,
your settings and continue using your any entries marked as private are
Treo.
immediately hidden or masked. If you
define a password, you must enter it to
display private entries. If you do not define
a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal
private entries without a password.
TIP After you create a password, you can lock
your system manually. Press Applications
and select Security. Select Lock & Turn Off,
and then select Off & Lock.
1
Open the entry that you want to mark
private.
TIP To change your password, select the
Password box, enter your current password,
and then enter the new password. To delete
your password, select the Password box and
then select Unassign.
2
3
4
Select Details.
Check the Private box.
Select OK.
Working with private entries
Hiding or masking all private entries
In most applications, you can mark
individual entries as private. All private
entries remain visible and accessible until
you select the Security setting. You have
three Security setting options:
Make sure the entries you want to mask or
hide are marked private.
1
Press Applications
Security
and select
.
2
Select the Current Privacy pick list and
select either Hide Records or Mask
Records.
Show Records: Private records are visible.
Hide Records: Private entries do not
appear anywhere in the application.
3
If prompted for your password, enter it
Mask Records: Private entries are
replaced with a gray bar that lets you know
the entry is there but keeps it from being
legible.
and then select OK.
204
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Viewing all private records
Security and Palm Desktop software
(Windows)
You can reveal all the entries you’ve hidden
or masked.
You can set the Windows version of
Palm® Desktop software to observe the
security password for your Treo 680. If you
forget your password, you cannot view
your information in Palm Desktop. If your
smartphone is unlocked, you can change
your password on your smartphone, but all
entries marked as private are deleted. You
can restore your private entries the next
time you sync and then create a new
password.
1
2
3
Press Applications
Security
and select
.
Select the Current Privacy pick list and
select Show Records.
If prompted for your password, enter it
and then select OK.
Viewing private entries in a specific
application
1
Open the application that contains the
private entries you want to see.
Follow these steps to recover from a lost
password:
2
3
Press Menu
.
1
Press Applications
Security
and select
Select Options, and then select
Security.
.
2
3
4
Select the Password box.
Select Lost Password.
Select Ye s .
4
Select the Current Privacy pick list and
select Show Records.
5
6
Select OK.
If prompted for your password, enter it
and then select OK.
TIP If you want additional security for
Palm Desktop files, you may want to purchase
a third-party solution.
205
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Entering owner information
You can use Owner Preferences to record
information that you want to associate with
your Treo 680, such as your name,
company name, and home phone number.
appears on the screen that requests your
password to unlock it, and you must also
enter your password to change the Owner
Preferences information.
5
Select Done.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Owner.
and select
.
System settings
2
3
If you assigned a password with the
Security application, select Unlock,
enter your password, and then select
OK to continue.
Setting the date and time
Date & Time Preferences enable you to
manually set the date, time, and location
(time zone) setting for your smartphone.
You can also set your Treo to synchronize
the date, time, and time zone with your
wireless service provider network when
your phone is on, you are inside a coverage
area, and the date, time, and time zone are
available from the network.
4
Enter the text that you want to appear in
the Owner Preferences screen.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Date & Time.
and select
.
2
206
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
3
Select the Automatically set pick list
and select one of the following settings:
4
If the Location pick list appears, select
it, and then select a city in your time
zone.
Date, time and time zone: The date,
time, and time zone are acquired from
your wireless service provider’s
network (if settings are available from
the network).
TIP If a city in the same time zone is not on
the list, select Edit List, select Add, select a
city in your time zone, and then select OK. If
necessary, modify any of the settings in the
Edit Location dialog box, and then select OK.
Date and time: Lets you set the time
zone manually. The date and time are
acquired from your wireless service
provider’s network (if settings are
available from the network).
5
6
If the Date and Time fields appear,
select the Date field and select the
date, and then select the Time field and
select the time.
Nothing: Lets you set the date, time,
and time zone manually. No info is
acquired from your wireless service
provider’s network.
Select Done.
TIP You can also set time zones for Calendar
Optimizing power settings
Power Preferences enable you to adjust
settings to maximize the battery’s
performance.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Power.
and select
.
2
207
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
3
Set any of the following preferences:
Beam Receive: Determines whether
your Treo is ready to receive information
over an infrared beam. If you leave this
option turned off, you must return to
this screen to turn on this option the
next time you want to receive a beam.
Brightness: Sets the intensity of the
screen and keyboard backlights. Drag
the slider or press Left and Right
to adjust the brightness level.
4
Select Done.
TIP You can also access the brightness setting
by pressing Option + P. To temporarily set the
backlight to the preset low setting, press
Option + Menu.
Connecting to a VPN
Auto-off after: Determines how long
your screen stays on during a period of
inactivity. When there is no interaction
with the keyboard or screen for the
specified time period, your smartphone
turns off automatically.
If you want to use your Treo to access your
corporate email account or other files on
your corporate server, you may need to set
up a virtual private network (VPN) on your
Treo. A VPN enables you to log in to your
corporate server through the company’s
firewall (security layer). You need a VPN
client on your smartphone if your
On a call, dim backlight after:
Determines how long the backlight
stays on at normal intensity during a
phone call. After the specified time
period, the backlight dims to conserve
power during a long phone call.
smartphone and your company’s server are
located on opposite sides of the firewall.
208
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
Check with your company’s system
administrator to see if a VPN is required to
access the corporate server. If a VPN is
necessary, you must purchase and install a
third-party VPN client on your smartphone
to use this feature.
1
2
Install your third-party VPN client. See
Installing applications for details.
Press Applications and select
Prefs
Select VPN.
.
3
4
Enter the settings provided by your
corporate system administrator.
TIP For information about third-party VPN
client software, see the Palm Software
Installation CD or visit www.palm.com/
209
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
10
210
CHAPTER
11
Common questions
Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have,
this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly
asked questions. For additional information and answers to
other common questions, visit www.palm.com/
In this chapter
Upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
•
•
•
Set data connection features, such as
activating or ending data connections
Upgrading
Provide web clipping features, such as
PQA files
If you experience problems with your
Palm® Treo™ 680 smartphone after
performing the upgrade steps in this guide,
you may have incompatible applications or
settings that were not quarantined during
the installation process. These
Incompatible applications or settings can
lead to numerous issues, including system
resets and freezes. If you experience a
problem after upgrading, follow the steps
in this section to remove the incompatible
apps from your smartphone and to transfer
your other info to your new smartphone.
Provide instant messaging features
If you want to continue using these types
of applications, please contact the
third-party developer for software updates
and info about compatibility with your Treo
680.
WINDOWS ONLY
1
On your computer, click
Start>Programs>Palm>Safe HotSync.
2
3
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Locate the Old_Apps folder on your
computer. This folder is usually located
inside one of the following folders:
C:\Program Files\Palm\
NOTE If you have trouble installing a
third-party application, contact the
developer for assistance.
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
We recommend that you do not install
apps that do any of the following:
4
To help you identify the app that is
causing the problem, move one app at a
time from the Old_Apps folder to the
Backup folder, and then sync.
•
•
Modify phone functions, such as
ringtones, dialing, or caller ID
Replace organizer features, such as
Contacts or Calendar
213
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
If the problem recurs, delete the last
app you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
2
3
Select your user folder and Option-drag
it to your Mac desktop to make a copy
of that folder.
Confirm that your copy includes the
Backup subfolder and that all the files in
the original Backup subfolder are also in
the copy of the Backup subfolder.
5
Repeat step 4 for each of the apps in
the Old_Apps folder.
NOTE If you have trouble moving apps
from the Old_Apps folder to the Backup
folder, or determining which files to move,
try reinstalling the app using the original
third- party developer files.
4
5
6
Delete all files from the original Backup
subfolder.
Perform a hard reset on your Treo 680.
Sync your Treo 680 with your new
desktop software and be sure to select
your existing device name from the
User list.
TIP Need more info on the Backup folder? See
MAC ONLY
7
To help you identify the app that is
causing the problem, move one
third-party app from the copy of the
Backup subfolder to the original
Backup subfolder, and then sync.
1
Locate your user folder on your
computer.
NOTE Your user folder name is the same
as your device name and is usually found in
this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users :
<your Mac username> : Documents :
Palm : Users
If the problem recurs, delete the last
app you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
8
Repeat step 7 for each of the third-party
apps in the copy of the Backup folder.
214
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
3
4
Quit any active applications, including
virus scanners and Internet security
applications.
Desktop software
installation
Make sure you’re installing the software
from the Palm Software Installation CD
that came with your new Treo 680.
Other versions of the desktop software
may not work with your Treo 680.
If you are having trouble installing the
desktop software, you may have the wrong
version of the software or some of your
computer’s resources may be unavailable.
5
Insert the Palm Software Installation CD
to restart the installation.
TIP The Palm Software Installation CD installs
software that lets you synchronize using
Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook
for Windows. If you want to synchronize using
a different personal information manager
(PIM), you must install a third-party solution.
Contact the PIM’s author or vendor to learn if
software is available for your Treo 680.
IMPORTANT Always use the same
language for your Treo, your computer
operating system, and your desktop
software. Otherwise, you may lose
information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for
mismatched language setups.
Follow these steps to retry the installation.
1
Make sure your computer profile
includes administrator rights to install
software. In large organizations, these
are usually granted by the system
administrator.
Resetting your Treo
Performing a soft reset
A soft reset is similar to restarting a
computer. If your Treo is not responding
or you have trouble synchronizing with your
computer, a soft reset may help. All your
2
Restart your computer.
215
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
info is retained when you perform a soft
reset.
Don’t know how? See Replacing the
1
Remove the battery from your
smartphone, and then reinsert it.
2
When the Palm logo appears, press and
hold Up
until the black status bar at
the bottom of the screen fills and
disappears, and then release Up
Don’t know how? See Replacing the
.
3
4
Delete the third-party application that
you suspect is causing the problem.
NOTE The reset begins when you reinsert
the battery.
Perform a soft reset. The wireless
features of your smartphone are not
available until you complete this step.
2
At the end of the soft reset, Date &
Time Preferences appears. Select
Done.
Performing a hard reset
Performing a system reset
A hard reset erases all information and
third-party software on your Treo. Never
perform a hard reset without first trying a
soft reset, a system reset, and trying to
resolve third-party software issues. (See
Third-party applications for suggestions on
diagnosing third-party software issues.)
After a hard reset, you can restore
previously synchronized information the
next time you sync.
A system reset, also called a safe or warm
reset, tells your Treo to stop what it’s doing
and start over again without loading any
system extras. If your Treo loops or freezes
during or after a soft reset, a system reset
may help. Performing a system reset can
release your Treo from an endless loop so
that you can uninstall a third-party
application that may be causing
the looping.
IMPORTANT If you set a password on
your smartphone, performing a hard reset
reformats your smartphone. This is a more
severe form of a hard reset, which
1
Remove the battery from your
smartphone, and then reinsert it.
216
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
removes all your information, and restores
your formats, preferences, and other
settings to the factory default settings.
your smartphone until the process is
complete. This may take up to 10 minutes.
4
When the language selection screen
appears, select the same language you
selected for your desktop software.
TIP Some third-party applications do not
create a backup on your computer when you
synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you
may lose data in these applications and you
will need to reinstall the application after the
hard reset. Please contact the application’s
developer to find out which data is backed up
during synchronization.
IMPORTANT Always use the same
language for your Treo, your computer
operating system, and your desktop
software. Otherwise, you may lose
information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for
mismatched language setups.
1
2
Remove the battery from your
smartphone, and then reinsert it.
5
(Optional) If you want to confirm that
the hard reset was successful, press
Don’t know how? See Replacing the
Applications
HotSync
and select
. If you see your device
When the Palm logo appears, press and
name in the upper-right corner, the hard
reset was not successful.
hold Power/End
until the black
status bar at the bottom of the screen
fills and disappears, and then release
Power/End
.
Replacing the battery
3
When the Erase all data? prompt
appears, press Up
to confirm the
hard reset.
Your Treo 680 comes with a replaceable
battery. Be sure to use a replacement
battery that is recommended or sold by
Palm and is compatible with the Treo 680.
IMPORTANT If a Reformatting in
progress message appears, do not touch
217
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
CAUTION Failure to use the proper battery
may result in a risk of personal injury or
product damage, and it voids your
smartphone warranty.
45-degree angle, and then press it into
place.
Battery contacts
1
2
Press Power/End
the screen.
to turn off
Smartphone
contacts
Press the Battery door release button,
and slide the battery door downward
to remove it from your smartphone.
Notch
Battery door
release button
IMPORTANT Use the battery that came
with your Treo 680. Do not use a battery
from another Treo model in your Treo 680.
Similarly, do not use the Treo 680 battery in
another Treo model. Using a battery that is
designed for another Treo model can
damage your Treo 680.
3
4
Place a finger in the notch next to the
battery, and lift up the old battery at a
45-degree angle to remove it from the
compartment.
5
6
Slide the battery door onto the back of
the smartphone until it clicks into place.
Connect your Treo to the charger or
sync cable to charge the new battery.
Align the metal contacts on the new
battery with the contacts inside the
battery compartment, insert the new
battery into the compartment at a
218
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
5
6
If the problem persists, connect your
battery) and perform a soft reset again.
TIP Be sure to dispose of your old battery
properly. In some areas, disposal in household
or business trash is prohibited.
If that doesn’t work, perform a hard
Screen
TIP To find carrying cases that protect the
screen and other useful accessories, visit
The screen appears blank
1
When a call lasts longer than the limit
specified in Power Preferences, the
screen dims automatically. In certain
lighting conditions, the screen may
appear blank when this occurs.
Press any key except Power/End to
restore the screen to normal brightness.
Pressing Power/End hangs up the call.
The screen doesn’t respond accurately to
taps or it activates wrong features
1
2
3
Press Applications
.
Use the 5-way
to select Prefs
to select
.
Use the 5-way
Touchscreen.
4
Follow the onscreen instructions to
align the screen.
2
When a period of inactivity lasts longer
than the limit specified in Power
Preferences, the screen turns off. Press
5
6
Select Done.
and release Power/End
to
If the problem persists, check for dirt
between the screen and the edge of the
smartphone.
wake up the screen.
3
4
Look closely at the screen. If you can
see a dim image, try adjusting the
screen brightness (see Adjusting the
7
If you’re using a screen protector, make
sure that it is properly installed.
If the screen is still blank, perform a soft
219
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
There’s a blinking bell in the upper-left
corner
your info by synchronizing with your
smartphone. To make sure you always
have an up-to-date backup of your info,
synchronize frequently.
The blinking bell in the upper-left corner of
the screen is the Alert icon. It appears
when you have alarms or messages that
you haven’t acknowledged.
This section describes synchronization
between your Treo and a desktop
computer running Palm Desktop software.
You can also synchronize the information
on your Treo using third-party applications.
See the documentation for the third-party
application for information on features and
configuration.
1
Press and hold Center
blinking bell with your stylus.
or tap the
2
When the list of pending alerts appears,
do any of the following:
• Select the text of the alert to view the
item. The item stays in the list.
Before you attempt to synchronize, make
sure you’ve installed the desktop
synchronization software from the Palm
Software Installation CD.
• Check the box next to an alert to clear
it from the list, and then select Done.
Synchronization
TIP Every device needs a unique name. Never
synchronize more than one device to the
same device name on your computer.
Synchronization backs up the information
from your Treo onto your computer and
vice versa. If you ever need to perform a
hard reset or otherwise need to erase all
your information on your smartphone, you
can synchronize your smartphone with
your computer to restore the info. Similarly,
if your computer crashes and your Palm
Desktop info is damaged, you can recover
I can’t find my user folder
Windows: If your device name is one
word, your user folder name is the first six
characters of your device name. If your
device name is two words, your user folder
name consists of the first six characters of
220
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
the second word of your device name
If an app that you deleted reappears on
followed by the first letter of the first word. your smartphone, try deleting the app from
For example, if your device name is John
Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ.
Your user folder is usually located inside
one of the following folders:
your Backup folder.
Palm Desktop does not respond to a sync
attempt
C:\Program Files\Palm\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
1
Make sure that the USB sync cable is
securely connected to the USB port on
your computer and on the bottom of
your smartphone (see Synchronizing
Mac: Your user folder name is the same as
your device name and is usually found in
this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users :
<your Mac username> : Documents :
Palm : Users
TIP If you’re having trouble trying to sync
using an IR or Bluetooth® wireless technology
connection, try using the USB sync cable
instead. If this solves the problem, then check
your IR or Bluetooth settings (see
What is the backup folder?
The Backup folder is located inside your
During synchronization, HotSync® Manager
puts a copy of most of your info and
applications in the Backup folder. (Some
third-party apps do not put a copy in the
Backup folder.) The next time you sync,
HotSync Manager compares the contents
of the Backup folder to the contents of your
smartphone, and then restores any missing
info or applications.
2
Make sure that HotSync manager is
running:
Windows: Right-click HotSync
manager
in the taskbar in the
lower-right corner of your computer
screen, and make sure that Local USB
is checked. If you don’t see the HotSync
manager icon, click Start, select
Programs, select Palm, and then select
HotSync Manager.
221
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
discoloration. Carefully clean the
connector by dipping a cotton swab in
some rubbing alcohol and gently wiping
the metal contacts on the connector.
Try to sync again.
Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac
hard drive. Double-click the HotSync
manager icon in the Palm folder. In
the Connection Settings panel, set the
Local Setup port to Palm USB.
9
Check the connector on the USB sync
cable for integrity and cleanliness. Make
sure the pins on the connector are
straight, protruding, and not damaged. If
the cable appears to be damaged, stop
here and locate another USB sync
cable.
3
Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
10 WINDOWS ONLY Uninstall
4
5
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
Palm Desktop software. Click Start,
select Settings, select Control Panel,
select Add or Remove Programs,
select Palm Desktop software, and
then click Change/Remove.
Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
6
If problems persist and you’re
synchronizing through a USB hub, try
connecting the sync cable to a different
USB port or directly to your computer’s
built-in USB port.
NOTE Mac computers do not provide an
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software. Contact Technical Support if the
problem persists after completing step 7.
7
8
Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
11 Reboot your computer.
12 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your Treo 680.
Check the multi-connector on the
bottom of your smartphone for debris or
222
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
Synchronization starts but stops without
finishing
2
3
Synchronize.
If the problem is resolved, begin
reinstalling your third-party applications
one at a time by double-clicking a single
file in the original Backup subfolder that
you renamed, and sync after each
application you install. If the problem
recurs, delete the last application you
installed and report the problem to its
developer.
TIP The HotSync Log can give you information
about your most recent synchronization.
Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
your computer screen, and then select View
Log.
Mac: Open Palm Desktop software. From the
HotSync menu, select View Log.
4
5
WINDOWS ONLY If the Windows
New Hardware Wizard appears, the
synchronization process may be timing
out before the wizard completes its job.
Follow all instructions in the New
If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS®
device or received a system error, such as
Sys0505, there may be conflicts with
software on your smartphone.
Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.
1
Locate your Backup subfolder and
rename the folder (for example,
BackupOld).
WINDOWS ONLY Uninstall
Palm Desktop software. Click Start,
select Settings, select Control Panel,
select Add or Remove Programs,
select Palm Desktop software, and
then click Change/Remove.
Windows: C:\Program
Files\Palm\<device name>
Mac: <Mac hard drive> : Applications
: Palm : Users : <device name>
NOTE Mac computers do not provide an
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software. Contact Technical Support if the
problem persists after completing step 3.
NOTE Can’t find a Palm folder in Program
Files? Then look for a palmOne or
Handspring folder instead. For more info,
6
Reboot your computer.
223
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
7
Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your Treo 680.
3
Open HotSync manager on your
computer, and make sure the necessary
conduits are set to Synchronize the
files.
Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t
appear where it should
NOTE If you need to change the setting to
Synchronize the files, be sure to check
the Set as default box as well.
1
Make sure you’re synchronizing with
the intended desktop personal
information manager (PIM). The Palm
Software Installation CD enables you to
choose whether you want to
4
WINDOWS ONLY Uninstall
Palm Desktop software. Click Start,
select Settings, select Control Panel,
select Add or Remove Programs,
select Palm Desktop software, and
then click Change/Remove.
synchronize with Palm Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook for
Windows. Reinsert the installation CD
and select Change your
synchronization method if necessary.
If you use a different PIM, you need to
install third-party software to
synchronize. For more information,
consult the company that makes the
PIM.
MAC ONLY Mac computers do not
provide an option for uninstalling Palm
Desktop software. Contact Technical
Support if the problem persists after
completing step 3.
5
6
Reboot your computer.
2
If multiple Palm OS devices are
synchronizing with your computer,
make sure the name of the device you
are synchronizing appears in the User
field on the toolbar of Palm Desktop
software.
Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your Treo 680.
7
(Outlook only) If you’re trying to
synchronize offline, set your Outlook
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to
be available offline.
224
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
5
6
Click Change.
TIP Outlook subfolders and public folders are
not accessible with the included software. You
may wish to use a third-party solution instead.
Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
7
If more than one application has
duplicate entries, repeat steps 4
through 6 for each application with
duplicates.
TIP (Outlook only) If you want to sync your
info with a global Exchange Address Book,
you must copy the addresses to your local
Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the
addresses and select Add to Personal
Address Book).
8
9
Click Done.
Synchronize your smartphone and your
computer.
TIP For more info on Outlook conduits,
right-click the HotSync manager icon in the
taskbar, select Custom, select an app with
Outlook in its name, and then select Help.
My appointments show up in the wrong
time slot after I sync
If you create an appointment in the wrong
time zone (i.e., your desktop was set to the
wrong time zone), it shows up in the wrong
time zone on your Treo. To be safe, enable
local network time and avoid assigning
time zones to your appointments.
I have duplicate entries in Microsoft
Outlook after I sync
1
Open Microsoft Outlook and delete the
duplicate entries.
2
On your computer, go to the application
with duplicate entries and manually
enter any info you added to your
smartphone since the last time
you synchronized.
If you’re using Microsoft Outlook:
1
Make sure that you installed the
Microsoft Outlook conduit that came
with your Treo 680. If you’re not sure
whether this software is installed,
reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your smartphone.
3
4
Right-click HotSync manager
taskbar and select Custom.
in the
Select an application that has duplicate
entries and also has Outlook in its
name.
225
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
2
3
Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the If you’re using Palm Desktop software:
wrong entries.
1
On your smartphone, press Calendar
On your computer, manually enter any
Calendar info you added to your
smartphone since the last time
you synchronized.
.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
4
5
Click HotSync manager
taskbar and select Custom.
in the
4
5
6
Uncheck the New events use time
zones box (if it’s checked).
Select an application that has both
Calendar and Outlook in its name.
On your computer, open Palm Desktop
software and correct the wrong entries.
6
7
Click Change.
On your computer, manually enter any
Calendar info you added to your
smartphone since the last time
you synchronized.
Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
8
9
Synchronize your smartphone and your
computer.
7
Click HotSync manager
in the
Repeat steps 4 through 6 to open the
Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog
box again.
taskbar and select Custom.
8
9
Select Calendar.
Click Change.
10 Make sure Synchronize the files is
selected and Set as default is checked,
and then click OK.
10 Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
11 Synchronize your smartphone and your
You should now be able to assign time
zones to your events without encountering
this problem.
computer.
12 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the
Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog
box again.
226
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
13 Make sure Synchronize the files is
selected and Set as default is checked,
and then click OK.
strength by looking at the Signal Strength
icon in the title bar of the Main tab in
the Phone application. The stronger the
signal, the more bars that appear. If you are
outside a coverage area, no bars appear.
You should now be able to assign time
zones to your events without
encountering this problem.
1
2
3
4
5
If you’re standing, move about ten feet
in any direction.
IMPORTANT To avoid this problem in the
future, do not assign time zones to your
events. Palm Desktop software does not
support time zones.
If you’re in a building, move near a
window. Open any metal blinds.
If you’re in a building, move outdoors or
to a more open area.
The text of my memos is truncated after I
sync
If you’re outdoors, move away from
large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.
If you use your desktop software to create
a memo that is longer than 4,096
characters, the excess characters are
truncated when you transfer the memo to
your Treo 680.
If you’re in a vehicle, move your Treo so
that it’s close to a window of your
vehicle.
My Treo won’t connect to the mobile
network
1
Try the suggestions about signal
strength described in Signal strength is
weak.
Phone
Signal strength is weak
2
3
Turn off your phone and turn it on again
Become familiar with low coverage areas
where you live, commute, work, and play.
Then you will know when to expect signal
strength issues. You can check signal
Remove the SIM card and reinsert it
227
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
4
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
My voice is too quiet on the other end
•
Be sure to place the bottom of the Treo,
or the hands-free microphone, close to
your mouth.
The other person hears an echo
•
Try decreasing the volume on your Treo
to avoid coupling or feedback on the
other person’s end. This applies to both
the speakerphone and the earpiece.
•
Check the Signal Strength
icon in
the title bar of the Main tab in the
Phone application. If the signal is weak
(few bars are displayed), try the
•
Position the earpiece closer to your ear
to prevent sound leaking back to the
microphone. Keep your hand away from
the microphone hole, which is on the
bottom right side of the smartphone.
suggestions about signal strength
I hear static or interference
Check the Signal Strength
icon in the
•
If you’re using the speakerphone
feature with your Treo lying on a flat
surface, try turning the Treo face down
(screen facing the surface).
title bar of the Main tab in the Phone
application. If the signal is weak (few bars
are displayed), try the suggestions about
signal strength described in Signal strength
I hear my own voice echo
If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free
Ask the person on the other end of the call
to turn down the volume on his or her
phone or to hold the phone closer to his or
her ear.
My phone seems to turn off by itself
If a system error and reset occur, the Treo
680 automatically turns the phone on if it
was on before the reset. However, if the
228
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
Treo 680 can’t determine if your phone was
on before the reset, the phone does not
phone on and off). If the problem persists
and you’re using third-party applications,
suggestions.
Hands-free devices
TIP Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in
optimum environmental conditions.
Performance and range may be affected by
physical obstacles, radio interference from
nearby electronic equipment, and other
factors.
My Treo makes or answers calls when it’s
in a bag or pocket
Items in your bag or pocket may be
pressing the onscreen Answer button or
otherwise activating screen items. If this
happens, be sure to press Power/End
to turn off the screen before
placing your Treo in a bag or pocket. You
may also want to disable the screen’s
touch-sensitive feature during incoming
I can’t make or receive calls using a
Bluetooth hands-free device
Confirm all the following:
•
The Bluetooth device is compatible with
your smartphone. Go to
for a list of compatible devices.
•
•
Press Applications
and select
Bluetooth
. Make sure the
TIP To find carrying cases that can help
prevent your smartphone from making calls,
as well as other useful accessories, visit
Bluetooth setting is On.
You have already formed a partnership
between your Treo 680 and your
hands-free device, and that the
hands-free device appears in the
Trusted Devices list. (see Connecting to
229
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
•
•
Your hands-free device is charged and
turned on.
TIP For best performance, keep your
Bluetooth hands-free device and your phone
on the same side of your body.
Your Treo is within range of the
hands-free device.
If the problem persists, turn the Bluetooth
setting Off and then turn it On again. If it
still persists, create a new partnership with
the hands-free device (see Connecting to a
Some features of my Bluetooth
hands-free device don’t work with my
Treo
•
Check the Palm compatibility list at
ensure that your device is compatible.
I hear static or interference when using
my Bluetooth hands-free device
•
Check the documentation that came
with your device or the manufacturer’s
website for information specific to
your device.
•
Try moving your Treo closer to the
hands-free device. Audio quality
degrades as the distance between your
Treo and hands-free device increases.
The effective range for a device varies
between manufacturers.
Email
•
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including
your body, are between your Treo and
your hands-free device.
•
For troubleshooting info on the
VersaMail application, see the User
®
Guide for the VersaMail Application on
your computer.
If the problem persists, turn the
Bluetooth setting Off and then turn it
back on again. If it still persists, create a
new partnership with the hands-free
device (see Connecting to a Bluetooth
Windows: Start>Programs>Palm
Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD
and click the link to the User Guide for
230
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
the VersaMail Application in the
have been correctly activated, and that
Documentation folder.
they are available at your location. Your
wireless service provider should be able
to tell you if text messaging services
have been experiencing transmission
delays. Delays can also occur between
the time that a message is sent and the
time it is received.
Messaging
I can’t tell if data services are available
When your phone is on, icons appear in the
title bar in the Main tab in the Phone
application to indicate whether data
services are available and whether a data
connection is active. Make sure that either
of the following icons appears in the title
•
•
Verify with the recipient that the
receiving device can handle text
messages.
If a text message arrives but does not
display an alert, perform a soft reset
bar of the Main tab:
. If you do not
see either of these icons, data services are
not available in your current location and
you cannot exchange multimedia
messages.
I can’t send or receive multimedia
messages
•
Make sure your phone is turned on (see
•
Contact your wireless service provider
to verify that your plan includes
I can’t send or receive text messages
•
Make sure your SIM card is inserted
correctly (see Inserting the SIM card
and battery) and your phone is turned on
multimedia messaging services (MMS),
that these services have been correctly
activated, and that they are available at
your location. Your wireless service
provider should be able to tell you if
multimedia messaging services have
been experiencing transmission delays.
•
Contact your wireless service provider
to verify that your plan includes text
messaging services, that these services
231
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
Delays can also occur between the time see either of these icons, data services are
that a message is sent and the time it is not available in your current location and
received.
you cannot connect to the Internet.
•
Make sure that either of the following
icons appears in the title bar of the Main
My Treo won’t connect to the Internet
tab:
. If you do not see either of Your Treo 680 supports GPRS and EDGE
wireless data networks. To connect to the
these icons, data services are not
available in your current location and you Internet, you must subscribe to and
cannot exchange multimedia messages. activate data services with your wireless
service provider, and you must be in a
location with data coverage.
•
•
Verify with the recipient that the
receiving device can handle multimedia
messages.
1
Press and hold Power/End
to
If a message arrives but does not
display an alert, perform a soft reset
turn off your phone. Then press
and hold the same button to turn it back
on again.
2
3
Press Phone
the following icons in the title bar of the
Main tab:
and look for either of
.
Web
If you see these icons, you are in a data
coverage area. Try connecting to the
Internet again. If you do not see either
I can’t tell if data services are available
When your phone is on, icons appear in the
title bar in the Main tab in the Phone
application to indicate whether data
services are available and whether a data
connection is active. Make sure that either
of the following icons appears in the title
of these icons, press Applications
,
select Prefs
, and continue with the
following steps.
4
Select Network.
bar of the Main tab:
. If you do not
232
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
5
Select the Service pick list and select
your wireless service provider’s data
service.
I can’t access a web page
First, make sure you have Internet access:
Open the web browser and try to view
another web page you’ve loaded before. To
ensure you’re viewing the page directly
from the Internet, press Menu
Go, and then select Refresh.
6
7
Select Connect.
If the connection is successful, go the
web browser. If you still can’t make a
connection, perform a soft reset (see
, select
If you can view the other web page after
you refresh it, but you still can’t access the
page you were originally trying to view, the
8
9
If your phone did not turn on
automatically after the soft reset, press
and hold Power/End
to turn on page may contain elements that are not
your phone, and try connecting to the
Internet.
supported by the web browser. These
include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript,
WMLScript, and other plug-ins.
Contact your wireless service provider
to verify the following:
Some websites use a redirector to their
true home page. If the web browser on
your smartphone can’t follow the
• Your subscription plan includes
high-speed data services.
redirector, try using a desktop browser to
see the landing page of the redirector, and
then enter that address in the web browser
on your smartphone.
• Data services have been activated on
your account.
• Data coverage is available in your
location.
• There are no data service outages in
your location.
TIP Your Treo can open your email application
when you select an email address on a web
page. If nothing happens when you select the
link, make sure your email application is
already set up.
233
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
It takes a long time for a web page to load
4
Try opening the web page again to see
if it loads faster.
If it is taking longer than usual to load web
pages, you may have traveled from an
EDGE service area to a GPRS service area.
Although GPRS data service is considered
An image or map is too small on
my screen
a high-speed data service, it seems slow if The web browser has two modes:
you are used to EDGE speed.
Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized
Mode resizes all images and page
elements to fit in a single column on the
smartphone screen. Switch to Wide Page
Mode to see the full-size image (see
1
Press Phone
and look for either of
the following icons in the title bar of the
Main tab to confirm that you have a data
connection:
.
2
Try opening a different web page to see
if the problem persists.
You may also be able to save the image on
your smartphone or an expansion card and
then view the image later on your
computer.
• If you can open a different web page,
it is likely that the original web site is
experiencing problems, and the
problem is not related to your Treo.
A secure site refuses to permit a
transaction
• If the problem persists on a different
web page, you may have a problem
with your connection to your wireless
service provider network.
Some websites don’t support certain
browsers for transactions. Please contact
the site’s webmaster to make sure the site
allows transactions using Blazer™ web
browser from your Treo.
3
To be sure there is not a problem with
your connection to your wireless
service provider network, press and
hold Power/End
to turn off
your phone. Then press and hold the
same button to turn it back on again.
234
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
My Bluetooth DUN connection isn’t
working
computer varies between
manufacturers.
Check all of the following:
•
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including
your body, are between your Treo and
your computer.
•
Press Applications
and select
Bluetooth
. Make sure the
If the problem persists, create a new
partnership with your computer (see
Bluetooth setting is On.
•
You have already formed a partnership
between your Treo 680 and your
•
•
The Bluetooth feature on your computer
is turned on.
Camera
Your Treo is within 30 feet of your
computer.
Here are some tips for taking good pictures
with the built-in camera:
TIP Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in
optimum environmental conditions.
Performance and range may be affected by
physical obstacles, radio interference from
nearby electronic equipment, and other
factors.
•
Clean the camera’s lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth.
•
Take pictures in bright lighting
conditions. Low-light images may be
grainy, due to the sensitivity of the
camera.
If the problem persists, try the following:
•
Hold the smartphone as still as
possible. Try supporting your
picture-taking arm against your body or
a stationary object (such as a wall).
•
Turn the Bluetooth setting Off and then
turn it back on again.
•
Try moving your Treo closer to your
computer. The effective range for a
235
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
•
•
Keep the subject of the picture still.
Exposure time is longer with lower light an expansion card. For more info on using
levels, so you may see a blur.
the Treo 680 itself to run applications from
expansion cards, see Using expansion
For best results, verify that you have the
brightest light source coming from
behind you, lighting the subject’s face.
Avoid taking indoor pictures with the
subject in front of a window or light.
If you store a large number of records or
install many third-party applications, the
internal memory on your smartphone may
fill up. Here are some common ways to
clear space:
•
Make sure the subject is at least 18
inches away from the camera to ensure
good focus.
Email: Messages that have large
attachments can quickly consume memory
on your Treo. Delete messages with large
attachments. If you have hundreds of
messages with or without attachments,
you may want to delete older messages to
make room (see the User Guide for the
VersaMail Application on your computer).
Remember that when you synchronize
your smartphone with your computer, your
camera images are stored in the My
Pictures/Palm Photos folder on your hard
Windows: Start>Programs>Palm
Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD
and click the link to the User Guide for
the VersaMail Application in the
Documentation folder.
Making room on your
Treo
Keep in mind that your Treo 680 includes
an expansion card slot, and that you can
store applications and information on
expansion cards (sold separately).
Pictures & Videos: Large images take up a
lot of memory. Move images to an
expansion card or synchronize them to your
computer, and then delete the images
However, you still need free memory on
236
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
Third-party
applications
Music: Music files often consume a lot of
memory. Move music files to an expansion
card, or delete large files from your Treo.
Some third-party applications can cause
conflicts on your Treo 680. For example,
third-party applications that were not
written with the Treo keyboard and 5-way
navigator in mind may cause strange
behavior or errors when using the keyboard
and 5-way navigator in these applications.
Third-party applications that modify
wireless features may require extra
troubleshooting.
Messaging: Multimedia content can also
consume a lot of memory. Move
multimedia content to an expansion card,
or delete large files from your Treo (see
Internet: If you set a large web browser
cache, you may want to use the web
browser’s advanced Memory Management
settings to clear all recent pages
settings).
If you recently installed an application and
your device seems to be stuck, try the
following:
Third-party applications: You can delete
infrequently used applications (see
Removing applications) or move them to an
1
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
2
If the problem persists, perform a
reset).
3
Delete the most recently installed
application from your Treo 680 (see
237
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
4
5
If the problem persists, perform another
system reset.
file in the original Backup subfolder that
you renamed, and sync after each
application you install.
If possible, synchronize your
smartphone with your computer to back 10 If the problem recurs, delete the last
up your most recent info.
application you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
6
If you’re unable to perform the
preceding steps or the problem
persists, locate your Backup subfolder
on your computer and rename the
folder (for example, BackupOld).
I can’t exit a game or third-party
application
Press Option
+ Applications
to
return to Applications View.
Windows: C:\Program
Files\Palm\<device name>
Getting more help
Mac: Mac hard drive> : Applications :
Palm : Users : <device name>
Contact the author or vendor of the
third-party software if you require further
assistance.
NOTE Can’t find a Palm folder in Program
Files? Then look for a palmOne or
Handspring folder instead. For more info,
Error messages
7
8
Perform a hard reset (see Performing a
Your Treo 680 is designed to minimize
interruptions when a system error occurs.
If your smartphone encounters a system
error, it automatically resets itself and
resumes functioning as normal. If possible,
it even turns the phone back on if it was on
before the error occurred.
Sync to restore your info in Calendar,
Contacts, Tasks, Memos, and Pictures
& Videos.
9
If the problem is resolved, begin
reinstalling your third-party applications
one at a time by double-clicking a single
238
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
Sometimes you might want to know more
about an error. Your Treo 680 uses a special
interface to show error messages in
greater detail.
3
4
Review the screen with details about
the conditions that led up to the most
recent automatic reset.
Select OK.
1
2
Press Phone
.
NOTE Third-party developers create their
own error messages. If you do not
understand an error message, please
contact the developer of the application for
help.
Enter #*377, and then press Send
.
239
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
11
240
Information: Many dialog boxes have a
Tips icon in the upper-right corner.
Select the Tips icon to learn about the
Where to learn more
tasks you can perform in that dialog box.
Whether you’re on the go or at your
computer, there are several ways to learn
more about using your Palm® Treo™ 680
smartphone.
Online support from Palm: For up-to-date
downloads, troubleshooting, and support
information, go to
For a quick introduction
Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces you
to many of the features on your Treo 680.
It is already installed on your Treo, and you
can open it any time. Press Applications
If you need more information
®
Books: Many books on Palm OS devices
are available in local or online book retailers
(look in the computers section), or visit
, and then select Quick Tour
.
Online forums: Consult online user
discussion groups to swap Treo
information and learn about Treo topics you
may find nowhere else. Visit
While using your Treo
On-device User Guide: A copy of this
guide is included right on your smartphone.
The on-device guide is specially formatted
for your smartphone screen. To view the
www.palm.com/treo680gsm for details.
on-device guide, press Applications
and then select My Treo
,
Customer service from your wireless
service provider: For questions about your
mobile account or features, contact your
wireless service provider.
.
Tips: Many of the built-in applications
include helpful tips for getting the most out
of your Treo. To view these tips, open an
application, press Menu
, select
Options, and then select Tips.
W H E R E T O L E A R N M O R E
241
W H E R E T O L E A R N M O R E
242
information over short distances. For more
Terms
CSD (circuit-switched data)
Alt (alternative)
A dial-up Internet connection. You pay for
the connection time, not how much
information you transfer. Contrast with
GPRS.
A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the
keyboard, and then press Alt
variations such as international characters
and symbols.
to access
Device name
Applications View
The name associated with your Treo 680
and with the info in your desktop software.
The device name (sometimes called the
username) distinguishes your Treo 680
The screen on your Palm® Treo™ 680
smartphone from which you can open all
applications.
®
from all other Palm OS devices. When you
Auto-off interval
first synchronize your Treo 680, you are
asked to give it a device name. This name
appears in the User list in Palm Desktop
software. Every Palm OS device that is
synchronized with the same computer
must have a unique device name.
The time of inactivity that passes before
the screen on your smartphone turns off.
The wireless features on your smartphone
are unaffected by this setting.
Beam
The process of sending or receiving an
entry or application using the infrared (IR)
port on your Treo.
Bluetooth® wireless technology
Dialog box
A set of options and command buttons that
is enclosed by a border and that enables
you to carry out a specific task.
Technology that enables devices such as
smartphones, mobile phones, and
computers to connect wirelessly to each
other so that they can exchange
T E R M S
243
EDGE (Enhanced Data rates for GSM
Evolution)
Infrared (IR)
A way of transmitting information using
An enhanced version of GPRS that delivers light waves; this is called beaming. The IR
data speeds that are up to three times
faster than standard GPRS connections.
(Additional charges may apply.)
port on your Treo enables you to transfer
information to other IR devices within a
short radius.
Favorite
Lithium Ion (Li-Ion)
A button that provides quick access to a
phone number (speed-dial button) or
commonly used application (such as Web
or Messaging). You can define an unlimited
number of favorite buttons in the Phone
application.
The rechargeable battery technology used
in the Treo 680.
MMS (Multimedia Messaging System)
An enhanced form of messaging that
enables you to send pictures, videos,
animations, sounds, and ringtones almost
instantly.
GPRS (General Packet Radio Service)
A mobile Internet connectivity technology
that allows persistent data connections.
(Additional charges may apply.)
Option key
The keyboard key that enables you to
access the alternative feature that appears
above the letter on each key.
®
HotSync
The technology that synchronizes your Treo
and your computer with the simple press
of a button.
Palm® Desktop software
A PIM application for computers that helps
you manage your personal information and
keep your personal information
HotSync manager
The computer application that manages the synchronized with your Treo.
synchronization of your Treo with your
computer.
T E R M S
244
Palm OS
PIM (personal information manager)
The operating system of your Treo 680.
Palm OS is known for its simplicity of use
and for the large number of compatible
third-party applications that can be added
to your smartphone.
A genre of software that includes
applications such as Palm Desktop
software, Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes,
and ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts,
schedules, tasks, and memos.
Palm™ Quick Install
PIN (personal identification number)
The component on your Windows
computer that enables you to install Palm
OS applications and other information on
your Treo.
The four-digit password assigned to your
SIM card by your wireless service provider.
Turning on the PIN lock secures your
wireless account. See also PUK.
Partnership
PIN2 (personal identification number 2)
Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your A code that protects certain network
smartphone and a hands-free device—that settings such as call barring or fixed dialing.
can connect because each device finds the
PUK (PIN unlock key)
same passkey on the other device. Once
A special extended password assigned to
you form a partnership with a device, you
your SIM card. If you enter the wrong PIN
don’t need to enter a passkey to connect
more than three times, your SIM card will
with that device again. Partnership is also
be blocked and you must call your wireless
known as paired relationship, pairing,
service provider for the PUK.
trusted device, and trusted pair on some
devices.
Quick key
Phone
A letter that you can press and hold to
activate a favorite from any tab in the
Phone app. For example, create a
speed-dial button for your mother's
number and enter the letter M for “Mom”
The application on your Treo 680 that
enables you to make and receive phone
calls.
T E R M S
245
as the Quick Key. Then when you want to
are typically sent to a mobile phone
call her, go to the Phone app and press and number, rather than an email address
hold M. Your smartphone dials the number. (although this too is possible). These
messages can usually include up to 160
SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card
characters; messages with more than 160
The smartcard, inserted in your Treo 680,
characters are automatically split into
that contains your mobile account
several messages. You can send and
information, such as your phone number
receive SMS messages while you are on a
and the services to which you subscribe.
voice call.
Phonebook entries and SMS messages
can also be stored on the SIM card.
Streaming
Technology that enables you to access
Slide
media content—for example, watch video
A collection of text, pictures, videos, and
or listen to an audio program—directly
sounds that are grouped together within a
multimedia message created in the
Messaging application. During playback, all
the items within a particular slide appear
from the Internet on your smartphone
without needing to download a file to save
on your smartphone.
User folder
on the same screen. If a multimedia
message contains multiple slides, each
slide can be viewed separately during
playback.
The folder on your computer that contains
the information you enter in Palm Desktop
software and the information you enter on
your smartphone and synchronize with
Palm Desktop software.
SMS (Short Messaging Service)
The service that exchanges short text
messages almost instantly. Text messages
T E R M S
246
Manufacturers Name:
Palm Inc.
Regulatory
information
Importer Name/Address:
Roy Bedlow
Buckhurst Court
London Road
Wokingham, Berkshire RG40 1PA,
UK
Type of Equipment:
Model Number:
Smartphone
Treo 680
2006
FCC Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
Year of Manufacture:
Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna
modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate
FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
FCC RF Safety Statement
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users
MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
1
A Palm® brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for
SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
2
An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and
provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body
and the unit.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CE Declaration of Conformity
Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact
with the body (i.e., on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will
rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure safety.
Application of Council Directive(s):
89/336/EEC (EMC directive), 99/5/EC (R&TTE directive)
73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive)
Standards to which Conformity is Declared:
Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) for Wireless
Smartphones
EN55022
Digital Device Emissions (Class B)
Radio Device EMC
Radio Equipment Emissions
Digital Device EMC
Product Safety
EN301-489
EN300-328
EN55024
The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF
energy absorbed in the head of a user of a wireless handset.
EN60950
The SAR value of a smartphone is the result of an extensive testing,
measuring and calculation process. It does not represent how much
EN50360/50361
SAR Safety
R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
247
RF the smartphone emits. All smartphone models are tested at their
highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in operation, the
SAR of a smartphone can be substantially less than the level reported
to the FCC. This is because of a variety of factors including its
proximity to a base station antenna, smartphone design and other
factors. What is important to remember is that each smartphone
meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs do not represent a
variation in safety.
Radio waves are created due to the movement of electrical charges in
antennas. As they are created, these waves radiate away from the
antenna. All electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light. The
major differences between the different types of waves are the
distances covered by one cycle of the wave and the number of waves
that pass a certain point during a set time period. The wavelength is
the distance covered by one cycle of a wave. The frequency is the
number of waves passing a given point in one second. For any
electromagnetic wave, the wavelength multiplied by the frequency
equals the speed of light. The frequency of an RF signal is usually
expressed in units called hertz (Hz). One Hz equals one wave per
second. One kilohertz (kHz) equals one thousand waves per second,
one megahertz (MHz) equals one million waves per second, and one
gigahertz (GHz) equals one billion waves per second.
All smartphones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates
a substantial margin of safety. As stated above, variations in SAR
values between different model smartphones do not mean variations
in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are
considered safe for use by the public.
To view the highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Palm® Treo™
RF energy includes waves with frequencies ranging from about 3000
waves per second (3 kHz) to 300 billion waves per second (300 GHz).
Microwaves are a subset of radio waves that have frequencies
ranging from around 300 million waves per second (300 MHz) to
three billion waves per second (3 GHz).
FCC Radiofrequency Emission
This smartphone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission
Guidelines and is certified with the FCC as.
FCC ID number: O8F850.
Industry Canada ID number: 3905A-850
More information on the smartphone's SAR can be found from the
following FCC Website:
How is radiofrequency energy used? Probably the most
important use of RF energy is for telecommunications. Radio and TV
broadcasting, wireless phones, pagers, cordless phones, police and
fire department radios, point-to-point links and satellite
communications all rely on RF energy.
Other uses of RF energy include microwave ovens, radar, industrial
heaters and sealers, and medical treatments. RF energy, especially at
microwave frequencies, can heat water. Since most food has a high
water content, microwaves can cook food quickly. Radar relies on RF
energy to track cars and airplanes as well as for military applications.
Industrial heaters and sealers use RF energy to mold plastic
materials, glue wood products, seal leather items such as shoes and
pocketbooks, and process food. Medical uses of RF energy include
pacemaker monitoring and programming.
(The following information comes from a consumer information
Website jointly sponsored by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
(FDA) and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC), entitled
“Cell Phone Facts: Consumer Information on Wireless Phones.” The
information reproduced herein is dated July 29, 2003. For further
updates, please visit the Website:
http://www.fda.gov/cellphones/qa.html.)
What is radiofrequency energy (RF)? Radiofrequency energy (RF)
is another name for radio waves. It is one form of electromagnetic
energy that makes up the electromagnetic spectrum. Some of the
other forms of energy in the electromagnetic spectrum are gamma
rays, x-rays and light. Electromagnetic energy (or electromagnetic
radiation) consists of waves of electric and magnetic energy moving
together (radiating) through space. The area where these waves are
found is called an electromagnetic field.
How is radiofrequency radiation measured? RF waves and RF
fields have both electrical and magnetic components. It is often
convenient to express the strength of the RF field in terms of each
component. For example, the unit “volts per meter” (V/m) is used to
measure the electric field strength, and the unit “amperes per
meter” (A/m) is used to express the magnetic field strength. Another
common way to characterize an RF field is by means of the power
R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
248
density. Power density is defined as power per unit area. For
example, power density can be expressed in terms of milliwatts (one
thousandth of a watt) per square centimeter (mW/cm2) or microwatts
(one millionth of a watt) per square centimeter (µW/cm2).
continuing to monitor the latest scientific findings to determine
whether changes in safety limits are needed to protect human health.
FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public
health and safety have worked together and in connection with WHO
to monitor developments and identify research needs related to RF
biological effects.
The quantity used to measure how much RF energy is actually
absorbed by the body is called the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR.
The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy. It is
usually expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg) or milliwatts
per gram (mW/g).
What levels of RF energy are considered safe? Various
organizations and countries have developed standards for exposure
to radiofrequency energy. These standards recommend safe levels of
exposure for both the general public and for workers. In the United
States, the FCC has used safety guidelines for RF environmental
exposure since 1985.
What biological effects can be caused by RF
energy? The biological effects of radiofrequency energy should not
be confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic
energy.
The FCC guidelines for human exposure to RF electromagnetic fields
are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations,
the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements
(NCRP) and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed by
scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry, government,
and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature
related to the biological effects of RF energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in X-rays
and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a process
where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in
atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage biological tissues
including DNA, the genetic material. Ionization only occurs with very
high levels of electromagnetic energy such as X-rays and gamma
rays. Often the term radiation is used when discussing ionizing
radiation (such as that associated with nuclear power plants).
Many countries in Europe and elsewhere use exposure guidelines
developed by the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection (ICNIRP). The ICNIRP safety limits are generally similar to
those of the NCRP and IEEE, with a few exceptions. For example,
ICNIRP recommends different exposure levels in the lower and upper
frequency ranges and for localized exposure from certain products
such as hand-held wireless telephones. Currently, the World Health
Organization is working to provide a framework for international
harmonization of RF safety standards.
The energy levels associated with radiofrequency energy, including
both radio waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause the
ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of
non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-ionizing radiation include
visible light, infrared radiation (heat) and other forms of
electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies.
Large amounts of RF energy can heat tissue. This can damage
tissues and increase body temperatures. Two areas of the body, the
eyes and the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because
there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.
The NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP all have identified a whole-body Specific
Absorption Rate (SAR) value of 4 watts per kilogram (4 W/kg) as a
threshold level of exposure at which harmful biological effects may
occur. Exposure guidelines in terms of field strength, power density
and localized SAR were then derived from this threshold value. In
addition, the NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP guidelines vary depending on
the frequency of the RF exposure. This is due to the finding that
whole-body human absorption of RF energy varies with the
The amount of RF radiation routinely encountered by the general
public is too low to produce significant heating or increased body
temperature. Still, some people have questions about the possible
health effects of low levels of RF energy. It is generally agreed that
further research is needed to determine what effects actually occur
and whether they are dangerous to people. In the meantime,
standards-setting organizations and government agencies are
frequency of the RF signal. The most restrictive limits on whole-body
exposure are in the frequency range of 30-300 MHz where the
R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
249
human body absorbs RF energy most efficiently. For products that
only expose part of the body, such as wireless phones, exposure
limits in terms of SAR only are specified.
RF safety requirements can be found in the FCC's OET Bulletin 65:
Low-powered, intermittent, or inaccessible RF transmitters and
facilities are normally excluded from the requirement for routine
evaluation for RF exposure. These exclusions are based on standard
calculations and measurement data indicating that a transmitting
station or equipment operating under the conditions prescribed is
unlikely to cause exposures in excess of the guidelines under normal
conditions of use. Such exclusions are not exclusions from
compliance, but, rather, exclusions from routine evaluation. The
FCC's policies on RF exposure and categorical exclusion can be found
in Section 1.1307(b) of the FCC's Rules and Regulations [(47 CFR
1.1307(b)].
The exposure limits used by the FCC are expressed in terms of SAR,
electric and magnetic field strength, and power density for
transmitters operating at frequencies from 300 kHz to 100 GHz. The
specific values can be found in two FCC bulletins, OET Bulletins 56
Why has the FCC adopted guidelines for RF exposure? The FCC
authorizes and licenses products, transmitters, and facilities that
generate RF and microwave radiation. It has jurisdiction over all
transmitting services in the U.S. except those specifically operated by
the Federal Government. While the FCC does not have the expertise
to determine radiation exposure guidelines on its own, it does have
the expertise and authority to recognize and adopt technically sound
standards promulgated by other expert agencies and organizations,
and has done so. (Our joint efforts with the FDA in developing this
website is illustrative of the kind of inter-agency efforts and
How can I obtain the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) value for
my wireless phone? The FCC requires that wireless phones sold in
the United States demonstrate compliance with human exposure
limits adopted by the FCC in 1996. The relative amount of RF energy
absorbed in the head of a wireless telephone-user is given by the
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), as explained above. The FCC requires
wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per
kilogram (1.6 W/kg) in terms of SAR.
consultation we engage in regarding this health and safety issue.)
Under the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA), the FCC
has certain responsibilities to consider whether its actions will
significantly affect the quality of the human environment. Therefore,
FCC approval and licensing of transmitters and facilities must be
evaluated for significant impact on the environment. Human
exposure to RF radiation emitted by FCC-regulated transmitters is
one of several factors that must be considered in such environmental
evaluations. In 1996, the FCC revised its guidelines for RF exposure
as a result of a multi-year proceeding and as required by the
Telecommunications Act of 1996.
Information on SAR for a specific phone model can be obtained for
many recently manufactured phones using the FCC identification (ID)
number for that model. The FCC ID number is usually printed
somewhere on the case of the phone. Sometimes it may be
necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you
oet/fccid. On this page, you will see instructions for entering the FCC
ID number. Type the FCC ID number exactly as requested (the
Grantee Code is the first three characters, the Equipment Product
Code is the rest of the FCC ID number). Then click on “Start Search.”
The “Grant of Equipment Authorization” for your telephone should
appear. Read through the grant for the section on “SAR Compliance,”
“Certification of Compliance with FCC Rules for RF Exposure” or
similar language. This section should contain the value(s) for typical or
maximum SAR for your phone.
Radio and television broadcast stations, satellite-earth stations,
experimental radio stations and certain wireless communication
facilities are required to undergo routine evaluation for RF compliance
when they submit an application to the FCC for construction or
modification of a transmitting facility or renewal of a license. Failure
to comply with the FCC's RF exposure guidelines could lead to the
preparation of a formal Environmental Assessment, possible
Environmental Impact Statement and eventual rejection of an
application. Technical guidelines for evaluating compliance with the
FCC.
Phones and other products authorized since June 2, 2000, should
have the maximum SAR levels noted directly on the “Grant of
Equipment Authorization.” For phones and products authorized
between about mid-1998 and June 2000, detailed information on
R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
250
SAR levels is typically found in the exhibits associated with the grant.
Once a grant is accessed, the exhibits can be viewed by clicking on
“View Exhibit.” Grants authorized prior to 1998 are not part of the
electronic database but, rather, have been documented in the form of
paper records.
companies that sold devices that claimed to protect wireless phone
users from radiation with making false and unsubstantiated claims.
According to FTC, these defendants lacked a reasonable basis to
substantiate their claim.
What are wireless telephone base stations? Fixed antennas used
for wireless telecommunications are referred to as cellular base
stations, cell stations, PCS (“Personal Communications Service”)
stations or telephone transmission towers. These base stations
consist of antennas and electronic equipment. Because the antennas
need to be high in the air, they are often located on towers, poles,
water tanks, or rooftops. Typical heights for freestanding base station
towers are 50-200 feet.
The FCC database does not list phones by model number. However,
consumers may find SAR information from other sources as well.
Some wireless phone manufacturers make SAR information available
on their own Web sites. In addition, some non-government websites
provide SARs for specific models of wireless phones. However, the
FCC has not reviewed these sites and makes no guarantees of their
accuracy. Finally, phones certified by the Cellular Telecommunications
and Internet Association (CTIA) are required to provide SAR
information to consumers in the instructional materials that come
with the phones.
Some base stations use antennas that look like poles, 10 to 15 feet in
length, that are referred to as “omni-directional” antennas. These
types of antennas are usually found in rural areas. In urban and
suburban areas, wireless providers now more commonly use panel
or sector antennas for their base stations. These antennas consist of
rectangular panels, about 1 by 4 feet in dimension. The antennas are
usually arranged in three groups of three antennas each. One
antenna in each group is used to transmit signals to wireless phones,
and the other two antennas in each group are used to receive signals
from wireless phones.
Do hands-free kits for wireless phones reduce risks from
exposure to RF emissions? Since there are no known risks from
exposure to RF emissions from wireless phones, there is no reason
to believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be
used with wireless phones for convenience and comfort. These
systems reduce the absorption of RF energy in the head because the
phone, which is the source of the RF emissions, will not be placed
against the head. On the other hand, if the phone is mounted against
the waist or other part of the body during use, then that part of the
body will absorb more RF energy. Wireless phones marketed in the
U.S. are required to meet safety requirements regardless of whether
they are used against the head or against the body. Either
At any base station site, the amount of RF energy produced depends
on the number of radio channels (transmitters) per antenna and the
power of each transmitter. Typically, 21 channels per antenna sector
are available. For a typical cell site using sector antennas, each of the
three transmitting antennas could be connected to up to 21
transmitters for a total of 63 transmitters. However, it is unlikely that
all of the transmitters would be transmitting at the same time. When
omni-directional antennas are used, a cellular base station could
theoretically use up to 96 transmitters, but this would be very
unusual, and, once again, it is unlikely that all transmitters would be in
operation simultaneously. Base stations used for PCS
configuration should result in compliance with the safety limit.
Do wireless phone accessories that claim to shield the head from
RF radiation work? Since there are no known risks from exposure
to RF emissions from wireless phones, there is no reason to believe
that accessories that claim to shield the head from those emissions
reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF
absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing
more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies have
shown that these products generally do not work as advertised.
Unlike “hand-free” kits, these so-called “shields” may interfere with
proper operation of the phone. The phone may be forced to boost its
power to compensate, leading to an increase in RF absorption. In
February 2002, the Federal trade Commission (FTC) charged two
communications generally require fewer transmitters than those
used for cellular radio transmissions, since PCS carriers usually have
a higher density of base station antenna sites.
Are wireless telephone base stations safe? The electromagnetic
RF signals transmitted from base station antennas stations travel
toward the horizon in relatively narrow paths. For example, the
radiation pattern for an antenna array mounted on a tower can be
R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
251
likened to a thin pancake centered around the antenna system. The
individual pattern for a single array of sector antennas is
wedge-shaped, like a piece of pie. As with all forms of
electromagnetic energy, the power decreases rapidly as one moves
away from the antenna. Therefore, RF exposure on the ground is
much less than exposure very close to the antenna and in the path of
the transmitted radio signal. In fact, ground-level exposure from such
antennas is typically thousands of times less than the exposure levels
recommended as safe by expert organizations. So exposure to
nearby residents would be well within safety margins.
to routinely monitor the emissions for all the thousands of
transmitters that are subject to FCC jurisdiction. However, the FCC
does have measurement instrumentation for evaluating RF levels in
areas that may be accessible to the public or to workers. If there is
evidence for potential non-compliance with FCC exposure guidelines
for a FCC-regulated facility, staff from the FCC's Office of Engineering
and Technology or the FCC Enforcement Bureau can conduct an
investigation, and, if appropriate, perform actual measurements.
Circumstances that could give rise to a concern about a facility's
conformance with FCC regulations can be found in A Local
Government Official's Guide to Transmitting Antenna RF Emission
Safety: Rules, Procedures, and Practical Guidance. This Guide can be
problems should be brought to the FCC's attention by contacting the
FCC RF Safety Program at: 202-418-2464 or by email:
Cellular and PCS base stations in the United States are required to
comply with limits for exposure recommended by expert
organizations and endorsed by government agencies responsible for
health and safety. Measurements made near cellular and PCS base
station antennas mounted on towers have confirmed that
ground-level exposures are typically thousands of times less than the
exposure limits adopted by the FCC. In fact, in order to be exposed to
levels at or near the FCC limits for cellular or PCS frequencies an
individual would essentially have to remain in the main transmitted
radio signal (at the height of the antenna) and within a few feet from
the antenna. This is, of course, very unlikely to occur.
Does the FCC maintain a database that includes information on
the location and technical parameters of all the transmitting
towers it regulates? Each of the FCC Bureaus maintains its own
licensing database system for the service(s) it regulates (e.g.,
television, cellular service, satellite earth stations.) The FCC issues
two types of licenses: site specific and market based. In the case of
site specific licensed facilities, technical operating information is
collected from the licensee as part of the licensing process. However,
in the case of market based licensing (e.g., PCS, cellular), the
licensee is granted the authority to operate a radio communications
system in a geographic area using as many facilities as are required,
and the licensee is not required to provide the FCC with specific
location and operating parameters of these facilities.
When cellular and PCS antennas are mounted on rooftops, RF levels
on that roof or on others near by would probably be greater than those
typically encountered on the ground. However, exposure levels
approaching or exceeding safety guidelines should be encountered
only very close to or directly in front of the antennas. In addition, for
sector-type antennas, typically used for such rooftop base stations, RF
levels to the side and in back of these antennas are insignificant.
General guidelines on antenna installations and circumstances that
might give rise to a concern about a facility's conformance with FCC
regulations can be found in A Local Government Official's Guide to
Transmitting Antenna RF Emission Safety: Rules, Procedures, and
Practical Guidance. This Guide can be accessed at: http://
Information on site specific licensed facilities can be found in the
“General Menu Reports” (GenMen) at http://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/cgi-bin/
The various FCC Bureaus also publish on at least a weekly basis, bulk
extracts of their licensing databases. Each licensing database has its
own unique file structure. These extracts consist of multiple, very
large files. The FCC's Office of Engineering and Technology (OET)
maintains an index to these databases at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/
database/fadb.html. Entry points into the various databases include
frequency, state/county, latitude/longitude, call-sign and licensee
name. For further information on the Commission's existing
Who regulates exposure to radiation from microwave ovens,
television sets and computer monitors? The Food and Drug
Administration is responsible for protecting the public from harmful
radiation emissions from these consumer products.
Does the FCC routinely monitor radiofrequency radiation from
antennas? The FCC does not have the resources or the personnel
R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
252
databases, you can contact Donald Campbell at [email protected] or
202-418-2405.
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory
actions, FDA has urged the wireless phone industry to take a number
of steps, including the following:
Can local and state governmental bodies establish limits for RF
exposure? Although some local and state governments have
enacted rules and regulations about human exposure to RF energy in
the past, the Telecommunications Act of 1996 requires the Federal
Government to control human exposure to RF emissions. In
particular, Section 704 of the Act states that, “No State or local
government or instrumentality thereof may regulate the placement,
construction, and modification of personal wireless service facilities
on the basis of the environmental effects of radio frequency
emissions to the extent that such facilities comply with the
Commission's regulations concerning such emissions.” Further
information on federal authority and FCC policy is available in a fact
sheet from the FCC's Wireless Telecommunications Bureau at
www.fcc.gov/wtb.
•
•
•
Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of
the type emitted by wireless phones;
Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure
to the user that is not necessary for device function; and
Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best
possible information on possible effects of wireless phone use
on human health
FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies
that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure
coordinated efforts at the federal level. The following agencies belong
to this working group:
•
•
•
•
•
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Environmental Protection Agency
Do wireless phones pose a health hazard? The available scientific
evidence does not show that any health problems are associated
with using wireless phones. There is no proof, however, that wireless
phones are absolutely safe. Wireless phones emit low levels of
radiofrequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used.
They also emit very low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode.
Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating
tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating
effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low
level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some
studies have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but
such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. In
some cases, other researchers have had difficulty in reproducing
those studies, or in determining the reasons for inconsistent results.
Federal Communications Commission
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
National Telecommunications and Information Administration
The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency
working group activities, as well.
FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless phones with the
Federal Communications Commission (FCC). All phones that are sold
in the United States must comply with FCC safety guidelines that
limit RF exposure. FCC relies on FDA and other health agencies for
safety questions about wireless phones.
What is FDA's role concerning the safety of wireless
phones? Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of
radiation-emitting consumer products such as wireless phones
before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical
devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if wireless
phones are shown to emit radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level that
is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the
manufacturers of wireless phones to notify users of the health hazard
and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard no longer
exists.
FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless phone
networks rely upon. While these base stations operate at higher
power than do the wireless phones themselves, the RF exposures
that people get from these base stations are typically thousands of
times lower than those they can get from wireless phones. Base
stations are thus not the primary subject of the safety questions
discussed in this document.
What kinds of phones are the subject of this update? The term
“wireless phone” refers here to hand-held wireless phones with
R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
253
built-in antennas, often called “cell,” “mobile,” or “PCS” phones.
These types of wireless phones can expose the user to measurable
radiofrequency energy (RF) because of the short distance between
the phone and the user's head. These RF exposures are limited by
Federal Communications Commission safety guidelines that were
developed with the advice of FDA and other federal health and safety
agencies. When the phone is located at greater distances from the
user, the exposure to RF is drastically lower because a person's RF
exposure decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the source.
The so-called “cordless phones,” which have a base unit connected
to the telephone wiring in a house, typically operate at far lower
power levels, and thus produce RF exposures well within the FCC's
compliance limits.
What research is needed to decide whether RF exposure from
wireless phones poses a health risk? A combination of laboratory
studies and epidemiological studies of people actually using wireless
phones would provide some of the data that are needed. Lifetime
animal exposure studies could be completed in a few years.
However, very large numbers of animals would be needed to provide
reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one exists.
Epidemiological studies can provide data that is directly applicable to
human populations, but 10 or more years' follow-up may be needed
to provide answers about some health effects, such as cancer. This is
because the interval between the time of exposure to a
cancer-causing agent and the time tumors develop—if they do—may
be many, many years. The interpretation of epidemiological studies is
hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF exposure during
day-to-day use of wireless phones. Many factors affect this
measurement, such as the angle at which the phone is held, or which
model of phone is used.
What are the results of the research done already? The research
done thus far has produced conflicting results, and many studies
have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal
experiments investigating the effects of radiofrequency energy (RF)
exposures characteristic of wireless phones have yielded conflicting
results that often cannot be repeated in other laboratories. A few
animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could
accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals.
However, many of the studies that showed increased tumor
development used animals that had been genetically engineered or
treated with cancer-causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to
develop cancer in the absence of RF exposure. Other studies
exposed the animals to RF for up to 22 hours per day. These
conditions are not similar to the conditions under which people use
wireless phones, so we don't know with certainty what the results of
such studies mean for human health.
What is FDA doing to find out more about the possible health
effects of wireless phone RF? FDA is working with the U.S.
National Toxicology Program and with groups of investigators around
the world to ensure that high priority animal studies are conducted to
address important questions about the effects of exposure to
radiofrequency energy (RF).
FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization
International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception
in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the development
of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven the
establishment of new research programs around the world. The
Project has also helped develop a series of public information
documents on EMF issues.
Three large epidemiology studies have been published since
December 2000. Between them, the studies investigated any
possible association between the use of wireless phones and
primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or acoustic neuroma,
tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other cancers.
None of the studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful
health effects from wireless phone RF exposures. However, none of
the studies can answer questions about long-term exposures, since
the average period of phone use in these studies was around three
years.
FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association
(CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development
Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety. FDA
provides the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts in
government, industry, and academic organizations. CTIA-funded
research is conducted through contracts to independent
investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory studies
and studies of wireless phone users. The CRADA will also include a
broad assessment of additional research needs in the context of the
latest research developments around the world.
R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
254
What steps can I take to reduce my exposure to radiofrequency
energy from my wireless phone? If there is a risk from these
products--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is probably
very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential
risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your exposure to
radiofrequency energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much
exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using
a wireless phone will reduce RF exposure.
sponsored by the Association for the Advancement of Medical
instrumentation (AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical
device manufacturers, and many other groups, was completed in late
2000. This standard will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac
pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wireless phone EMI.
FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless
phones and helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by the
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). This standard
specifies test methods and performance requirements for hearing
aids and wireless phones so that no interference occurs when a
person uses a “compatible” phone and a “compatible” hearing aid at
the same time. This standard was approved by the IEEE in 2000.
If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless phone every
day, you could place more distance between your body and the
source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with
distance. For example, you could use a headset and carry the
wireless phone away from your body or use a wireless phone
connected to a remote antenna.
FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless phones for possible
interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful interference
be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to assess the
interference and work to resolve the problem.
Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless phones
are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF exposure from
these products, you can use measures like those described above to
reduce your RF exposure from wireless phone use.
Which other federal agencies have responsibilities related to
potential RF health effects? Certain agencies in the Federal
Government have been involved in monitoring, researching or
regulating issues related to human exposure to RF radiation. These
agencies include the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA), the National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH), the National Telecommunications and
Information Administration (NTIA) and the Department of Defense
(DOD).
What about children using wireless phones? The scientific
evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless phones,
including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower
exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures described
above would apply to children and teenagers using wireless phones.
Reducing the time of wireless phone use and increasing the distance
between the user and the RF source will reduce RF exposure.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised
that children be discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For
example, the government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets
containing such a recommendation in December 2000. They noted
that no evidence exists that using a wireless phone causes brain
tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit wireless
phone use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on
scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
By authority of the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of
1968, the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the
FDA develops performance standards for the emission of radiation
from electronic products including X-ray equipment, other medical
devices, television sets, microwave ovens, laser products and
sunlamps. The CDRH established a product performance standard for
microwave ovens in 1971 limiting the amount of RF leakage from
ovens. However, the CDRH has not adopted performance standards
for other RF-emitting products. The FDA is, however, the lead federal
health agency in monitoring the latest research developments and
advising other agencies with respect to the safety of RF-emitting
products used by the public, such as cellular and PCS phones.
What about wireless phone interference with medical
equipment? Radiofrequency energy (RF) from wireless phones can
interact with some electronic devices. For this reason, FDA helped
develop a detailed test method to measure electromagnetic
interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators
from wireless telephones. This test method is now part of a standard
R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
255
The FDA's microwave oven standard is an emission standard (as
opposed to an exposure standard) that allows specific levels of
microwave leakage (measured at five centimeters from the oven
surface). The standard also requires ovens to have two independent
interlock systems that prevent the oven from generating microwaves
the moment that the latch is released or the door of the oven is
opened. The FDA has stated that ovens that meet its standards and are
used according to the manufacturer's recommendations are safe for
consumer and industrial use. More information is available from:
The Department of Defense (DOD) has conducted research on the
biological effects of RF energy for a number of years. This research is
now conducted primarily at the U.S. Air Force Research Laboratory
located at Brooks Air Force Base, Texas. The DOD Web site for RF
biological effects information is listed with other sites in conjunction
with a question on other sources of information, below.
Who funds and carries out research on the biological effects of
RF energy? Research into possible biological effects of RF energy
is carried out in laboratories in the United States and around the
world. In the U.S., most research has been funded by the
Department of Defense, due to the extensive military use of RF
equipment such as radar and high-powered radio transmitters. In
addition, some federal agencies responsible for health and safety,
such as the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the U.S.
Food and Drug Administration (FDA), have sponsored and conducted
research in this area. At the present time, most of the non-military
research on biological effects of RF energy in the U.S. is being funded
by industry organizations. More research is being carried out
overseas, particularly in Europe.
The EPA has, in the past, considered developing federal guidelines for
public exposure to RF radiation. However, EPA activities related to RF
safety and health are presently limited to advisory functions. For
example, the EPA now chairs an Inter-agency Radiofrequency
Working Group, which coordinates RF health-related activities among
the various federal agencies with health or regulatory responsibilities
in this area.
OSHA is responsible for protecting workers from exposure to
hazardous chemical and physical agents. In 1971, OSHA issued a
protection guide for exposure of workers to RF radiation [29 CFR
1910.97]. However, this guide was later ruled to be only advisory and
not mandatory. Moreover, it was based on an earlier RF exposure
standard that has now been revised. At the present time, OSHA uses
the IEEE and/or FCC exposure guidelines for enforcement purposes
under OSHA's “general duty clause” (for more information see:
In 1996, the World Health Organization (WHO) established the
International EMF Project to review the scientific literature and work
towards resolution of health concerns over the use of RF technology.
WHO maintains a Web site that provides extensive information on
this project and about RF biological effects and research
FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public
health and safety have worked together and in connection with WHO
to monitor developments and identify research needs related to RF
biological effects.
NIOSH is part of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services.
It conducts research and investigations into issues related to
occupational exposure to chemical and physical agents. NIOSH has,
in the past, undertaken to develop RF exposure guidelines for
workers, but final guidelines were never adopted by the agency.
NIOSH conducts safety-related RF studies through its Physical
Agents Effects Branch in Cincinnati, Ohio.
How does FCC audit cell phone RF? After FCC grants permission
for a particular cellular telephone to be marketed, FCC will
occasionally conduct “post-grant” testing to determine whether
production versions of the phone are being produced to conform with
FCC regulatory requirements. The manufacturer of a cell phone that
does not meet FCC's regulatory requirements may be required to
remove the cell phone from use and to refund the purchase price or
provide a replacement phone, and may be subject to civil or criminal
penalties. In addition, if the cell phone presents a risk of injury to the
user, FDA may also take regulatory action. The most important
post-grant test, from a consumer's perspective, is testing of the RF
The NTIA is an agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce and is
responsible for authorizing Federal Government use of the RF
electromagnetic spectrum. Like the FCC, the NTIA also has NEPA
responsibilities and has considered adopting guidelines for evaluating
RF exposure from U.S. Government transmitters such as radar and
military facilities.
R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
256
emissions of the phone. FCC measures the Specific Absorption Rate
(SAR) of the phone, following a very rigorous testing protocol. As is
true for nearly any scientific measurement, there is a possibility that
the test measurement may be less than or greater than the actual RF
emitted by the phone. This difference between the RF test
measurement and actual RF emission is because test measurements
are limited by instrument accuracy, because test measurement and
actual use environments are different, and other variable factors. This
inherent variability is known as “measurement uncertainty.” When
FCC conducts post-grant testing of a cell phone, FCC takes into
account any measurement uncertainty to when determining whether
regulatory action is appropriate. This approach ensures that
when FCC takes regulatory action, it will have a sound, defensible
scientific basis.
Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by
the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To most
people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances.
For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet,
building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock—the
discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little shock
discharges the built-up static electricity.
ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can
harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take
measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your
Palm® device, from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections
against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless
neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your equipment.
Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for
plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to
entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your Palm
device, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity
that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the
device. Then, when the device is connected to another device such
as a docking station, a discharge event can occur.
FDA scientific staff reviewed the methodology used by FCC to
measure cell phone RF, and agreed it is an acceptable approach,
given our current understanding of the risks presented by cellular
phone RF emissions. RF emissions from cellular phones have not
been shown to present a risk of injury to the user when the
measured SAR is less than the safety limits set by FCC (an SAR of 1.6
w/kg). Even in a case where the maximum measurement uncertainty
permitted by current measurement standards was added to the
maximum permissible SAR, the resulting SAR value would be well
below any level known to produce an acute effect. Consequently,
FCC's approach with measurement uncertainty will not result in
consumers being exposed to any known risk from the RF emitted by
cellular telephones.
Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up
static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before
touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another.
The recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution
before connecting your Palm device to your computer, placing a
device in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do
this in many ways, including the following:
FDA will continue to monitor studies and literature reports concerning
acute effects of cell phone RF, and concerning chronic effects of
long-term exposure to cellular telephone RF (that is, the risks from
using a cell phone for many years). If new information leads FDA to
believe that a change to FCC's measurement policy may be
appropriate, FDA will contact FCC and both agencies will work
together to develop a mutually-acceptable approach.
•
Ground yourself when you’re holding your device by
simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.
For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged
into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case
should discharge the ESD on your body.
•
•
Increase the relative humidity of your environment.
Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Palm® Device
Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can
contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment
include the following:
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices
if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such
an occurrence.
•
Low relative humidity.
R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
257
•
•
Material type. (The type of material gathering the charge. For
example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural
fibers like cotton.)
téléphone mobile Ils apportent en outre un plus grand confort
d’utilisation.
Eloigner le téléphone mobile de certaines zones sensibles telles que
le ventre chez les femmes enceintes ou le bas-ventre chez les
adolescents, plus particulièrement lors d’une communication.
The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect
electronic devices.
Utiliser votre téléphone mobile dans de bonnes conditions de
réception. Celle-ci est indiquée sur l’écran de votre téléphone par la
matérialisation de barrettes. 3 ou 4 barrettes, la réception est de
bonne qualité pour passer vos communications. Ce n'est pas
toujours le cas dans certaines zones ou situations, notamment les
parking souterrains, les ascenseurs, en train ou en voiture ou tout
simplement dans un secteur mal couvert par le réseau.
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge
static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD
events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your
electronic equipment against ESD.
Precaution against hearing loss Protect your hearing. Listening to
this device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your
hearing.
Mesures touchant à la sécurité : Dans certains lieux ou situations,
tels que les avions, les hôpitaux, les stations-service et les garages
professionnels, l'usage du téléphone est interdit. Il est donc impératif
de respecter strictement les consignes de sécurité propres à
chacune de ces situations et d’éteindre votre téléphone lorsque cela
est requis.
A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut
endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez notre site web
www.palm.com/fr pour plus d'informations.
Par ailleurs pour éviter les risques d’interférences, les personnes
porteuses d’implants électroniques (stimulateurs cardiaques,
pompes à insuline, neurostimulateurs..) doivent conserver une
distance de 15 cm entre le mobile et l’implant et ne l’utiliser que du
côté opposé au côté où celui-ci est situé.
Waste disposal Please recycle appropriately. For appropriate
environment.
Téléphoner en conduisant, même avec des équipements qui ne sont
pas interdits par la réglementation, est dangereux car il augmente
potentiellement le risque d’accident provenant de la distraction créée
par la conversation elle même. Aussi, est-il recommandé de ne
jamais téléphoner en conduisant et de considérer que l’utilisation
d’un kit mains-libres n’est pas une solution.
(1) Valeur DAS la plus élevée pour ce modèle de téléphone et pour
une utilisation à l’oreille, communiquée par le constructeur. Le DAS,
exprimé en w/kg, quantifie le niveau d’exposition aux ondes
électromagnétiques et permet de vérifier la conformité des mobiles à
la réglementation française et européenne qui impose que celui-ci
soit inférieur à 2w/kg.
Précautions d'usage de votre téléphone mobile
Le taux de DAS(1) (Débit d’Absorption Spécifique) de votre Treo 680
smartphone est 0,655 w/kg
Conseils d'utilisation pour réduire le niveau d'exposition aux
rayonnements : Utiliser le plus souvent possible les kits piétons
(oreillettes), notamment en cas d'usage fréquent ou prolongé du
R E G U L A T O R Y I N F O R M A T I O N
258
Specifications
Radio
•
GSM 850/900/1800/1900 quad band world phone
GPRS class 10, class B
•
•
•
EDGE up to 59kbps per time-slot
Supports CSD (circuit-switched data)
Speakerphone
Phone features
•
•
•
•
•
Hands-free headset jack (2.5mm, 3 or 4-barrel connector)
Microphone mute option
TTY/TDD compatible
3-way calling
Processor technology
Expansion
Intel PXA270 Bulverde processor, 312MHz
SD/MultiMediaCard/SDIO card slot
Battery
•
•
1200mAH, rechargeable lithium ion
Removable for replacement
Palm OS® version
Camera
Palm OS 5.4.9
•
•
•
•
Still image capture resolution (640 x 480)
2x digital zoom
Video capture resolution (320 x 240)
Automatic light balance
Size
4.44 in. x 2.33 in. x 0.84 in. (112.9mm x 59.3mm x 22.4mm)
5.3 ounces (150 grams)
Weight
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
259
Connectivity
Display
•
•
IR
®
Bluetooth wireless technology (1.2 compliant)
Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)
65,536 colors (16-bit color)
•
•
•
•
User-adjustable brightness
320 x 320 resolution
Keyboard
•
•
Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator
Backlight for low lighting conditions
Included software
•
Phone (including Favorites
and Dial Pad)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Contacts
Calendar
•
Pictures & Videos
(includes camera and
camcorder)
Memos
Tasks
Voice Memo
Documents To Go
Professional
•
•
•
Messaging (text and
multimedia)
®
®
Blazer web browser
•
Calculator Basic and
Advanced
(Internet)
®
Pocket Tunes™VersaMail
•
•
World Clock
Palm® Desktop software
(email)
System requirements
•
•
•
Windows 2000 or XP with USB port
Mac OS 10.2 –10.3 with USB port
Later versions may also be supported
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
260
Operating and storage
temperature range
•
•
32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
5% to 90% relative humidity (RH)
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
261
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
262
selecting menu items and
on-device documentation
Palm online support 241
Pocket Tunes 140
Quick Tour 241
Index
A
SYMBOLS
accessing
! in Tasks list 156
NUMERICS
Alert dialog box 167
alternate character list 34
application menus 29
applications 36, 37
Applications View 35
calculator 168
24-hour clock 195
3G2 files 132, 136
3GP files 132
5-way navigator
accessingapplicationsand
accessing command
buttons and 29
answering phone calls and
entering alternate
characters and 33
highlighting and selecting
items and 28
web browser 36, 110
World Clock 153
accessories 7, 251
Account Name field 83
Account Setup command 84
Call Log 46
camera 127
command buttons 29
corporate servers 209
Dial Pad 51
email 81–95, 208
Favorites pages 45
files 161, 208
HotSync manager 179
information 202
items on expansion cards
accounts
See also email accounts
call forwarding and 55
conference calls and 54
corporate mail servers and
customer service support
for 241
setting preferences for 91
voicemail and 48
location of 7
moving around screen and
scrolling web pages and
Accounts command 91
Acrobat files 161
items on pick lists 30
music player 139
INDE X
263
Active Call View screen 50,
Add Bookmark command
Add Call button 51
Add Contact command 53
Add New Number dialog box
Add New Number prompt 52
Add Song button 142
Add to album command 134
adding
events 146, 147
web links and 109
adjusting screen brightness
adjusting volume
alarm tones 151
music 141
ringer 72
video clips 130
voice memos 164
Advanced Mode (calculator)
Advanced Mode command
agenda lists 145
Alarm check box 147
alarm clock 154
memos 162
phone numbers 52
photos to albums 134
playlists 141, 142
private entries 204
QuickText phrases 96
signatures 94
tasks 154
accessories 7
additional security 205
attachments 86–87
videos to albums 134
voice memos 163
wallpaper 135
addresses
bookmarks 111
business cards 60
caller ID photos 58, 59
captions to photos 128,
adding multiple recipients AlarmPreferencescommand
assigning to favorite
buttons 63
Alarm Sound pick list 152,
highlighting email 28
alarm tones 151
categories for applications
multimedia messages and alarms
See also alerts
cities to World Clock 153
contacts 57
email addresses 85
emoticons 96
sending email and 85
synchronizing 225
adding to calendar 147,
recording sounds for 152
I N D E X
264
setting for clock 154
Album command 134
Album list 131, 133, 135
video albums
Alert dialog box 49, 99, 167
alert icon 76
Alert Sound pick list 92
alerts
Application pick list 193
application preferences 198,
applications
See also specific built-in
applications
accessing 36, 37
associating with buttons
sending over Bluetooth
devices 175
setting default 199
switching 51
synchronizing 23, 179
troubleshooting 213
viewing information about
beaming 178
See also alarms
clearing 168
displaying 167
message text in 103
receiving messages and
categorizing 197
changing screen fonts for
closing 35
copying 187
viewing menus for 29
viewing tips for 241
Applications View
accessing 35
voicemail and 49
aligning the screen 196
alternate characters list 34
anniversaries 148
Answer button 47
answering phone calls 47
antenna 247
copying text to 115
displaying 197
getting help with 172
moving around in 25
playing music and 141
running on expansion
cards 236
accessing items on
expansion cards and
copying applications from
defined 243
displaying applications in
opening applications and
overview 36–37
applications, exiting 238
appointments 146, 225
applets 109
application categories 37
application list view 197
searching in 167
INDE X
265
See also events
Archive folder 172
area codes 74
area conversions 169
arrow icons 27
See also multimedia
memos
audio adapter 65
background music 133
backing up information 18,
ASF files 132
audio captions
adding 128, 135
background music and
playing 132
Audio icon 132
Auto answer pick list 69
Ask to add unknown phone
numbers option 52, 60
Attach image option 97
Attach ringtone option 98
Attach Signature check box
Backlight button 194
Backspace key 31
Basic Mode (calculator) 168
Basic Mode command 168
basics 241
battery
attachments
displaying 89
Auto naming pick list 130
Auto Sync dialog box 91
auto sync failures 92
Auto-complete check box
Auto-hide Toolbar option 133
Auto-Keyguard pick list 200
automated voicemail
systems 48
displaying remaining
power on 78
disposing of 219
inserting 10
maximizing life of 13, 207
removing 218
viewing status of 13
battery consumption 14
battery door release 8
battery icon 13, 77
Beam Business Card
command 60
downloading 89
multimedia messages and
multiple files and 86
opening 161
pictures as 86, 128
removing 86
storing large 236
video clips as 86, 130
voice memos as 164
attendee information 148
audio 193
Auto-off After pick list 208
auto-off interval 243
B
back icon (browser) 110
Background check box 150
Beam Category command
I N D E X
266
Beam From pick list 178
Beam Receive pick list 208
Beam Status dialog box 177,
Bluetooth devices
connecting to 66, 121–
disabling or enabling 14,
Bookmark Page icon 113
bookmarks 111–113, 177
Bookmarks View icon 112
border glow (highlight) 28
beaming
battery life and 14
defined 243
overview 176–178
troubleshooting 177, 178
turning off 208
optimal range for 66
receiving information from
receiving phone calls and
sending over 174, 175
setting up 66–67
synchronizing over 181,
troubleshooting 229, 230,
Bluetooth icon 66, 78
Bluetooth icons (Phone
application) 76
Bluetooth network icon 120
Bluetooth wireless
BMP files 131
applications
brightness duration
Brightness slider 208
browsing files 187
browsing
bell 76, 167, 220
birthdays 148
blank screens 219
blank text messages 95
blank time slots 150
Blazer application 109
See also web browser
Bluetooth adapter 118, 119
Bluetooth application
opening 66
sending from 175
setting up connections
setting up dial-up
See also applications;
specific application
built-in security software 199
business cards 60, 177
buttons
See also favorite buttons
5-way navigator 27
accessing command 29
changing defaults for 198
customizing 198
networking and 119
visibility options in 175,
highlighted on screen 28
INDE X
267
restoring factory defaults
speed-dialing with 45, 62–
web browsing and 110
Buttons Preferences screen
viewing tasks on 150
Calendar application
changing fonts for 194
changing views for 145
color-coding events 149
creating events with 146,
displaying events 73
overview 145
setting alarms from 147
setting default view for
setting display options in
in 23
Calendar button 7, 35, 36,
Call Barring command 72
Call Barring preferences 72
call forwarding 55–56
call forwarding icon 76
Call Log screen 46, 53
Call Preferences command
Call Totals dialog box 56
call waiting 53
Call Waiting dialog box 54
camcorder buttons 129
camera buttons 128
camera lens 8
C
cache 117, 237
Calc button 168
calculating disk space 18
calculator 33, 168
calculator modes 168
calendar
See also Calendar
application
customizing 150–151
deleting events from 149
displaying 145
saving 100
Camera View 130, 135
cancelling menu selection 29
Caps Lock mode 32
voice captions
Card category 186
Card Info button 188
card readers 139
carrying cases 229
cascading style sheets 111,
selecting alarm tones for
selecting specific dates on
categories
adding ringtones for 59
beaming and 177
Call Preferences dialog box
I N D E X
268
color-coding in 149
creating 197
memos and 163
naming 197
QuickText phrases 96
screen fonts 194
synchronization defaults
synchronization software
City pick list 153
Clear Cache button 117
Clear Cookies button 117
See also World Clock
closing
receiving from Bluetooth
and 176
web page layouts 110
character entry 32, 34
See also text
character limits
memos 162
text messages 95
character searches 167
charge indicator 7, 12, 13
charger cable 12
charging
application menus 29
applications 35
pick lists 30
closing applications 238
color palette 130
Color Theme Preferences
screen 196
Category command 197
category marker 150
CDs 139
Center button 7
certificates 109
color-coded category marker
changing
bookmarks 112
button defaults 198
contact information 58
default applications 199
email accounts 91
events 149
charging status 13
Chat view 101
colored backgrounds 28
command buttons 29
favorite buttons 63
information 16
owner information 206
personal IDs 202
playlists 142
Choose song button 141
Choose Songs command
circuit-switched data
connections 243
completion dates 157
components (smartphone) 1
Compress Day View check
box 150
city information 153, 207
INDE X
269
compressed files 170, 171
computers
Confirm message deletion
check box 102
sending over Bluetooth
setting up Bluetooth 181
setting up smartphone 16
synchronizing over
Bluetooth 181, 182
synchronizing over
creating partnerships for
downloading applications
to 171
conflicting events 150
Connect Bluetooth
command 68
connecting
installing applications from
installing synchronization
software on 20
to Bluetooth devices 66,
to personal computers 16,
troubleshooting 48, 227,
unsupported 121
viewing status of 76, 110,
setting up DUN
connections for 119
transferring information to
consumptionfactors(battery)
Contact Edit dialog box 57
contact names 44
contacts
to voicemail system 48,
to websites 109, 110,
transferring multimedia to connection icons (browser)
See also Contacts
application
transferring music from
Con button (calculator) 169
Conduit Settings command
connections
dial-up networking and
messaging preferences
for 103
adding photos to 135
adding speed-dial buttons
for 62
assigning caller IDs to 59
copying 61
Conference button 54
conference calls 54
receiving over Bluetooth
restrictions for 51
creating 57
customizing 60
deleting 60
I N D E X
270
displaying 58
editing 58
entering phone numbers
for 52, 73
importing 58
contact information 61
multimedia files 136, 139
music files 138
phone numbers 43, 115
photos 133
categories for applications
chat sessions 101, 103
cities for World Clock 153
contacts 57
looking up 62
marking as private 57
reordering 57
text 114
user folders 214
videos 133
events 146, 147
memos 162
saving 100
copyrighted materials 133
corporate email accounts
See language settings
multimedia messages 97
playlists 141, 142
private entries 204
QuickText phrases 96
signatures 94
viewing details about 45
Contacts application 57
adding events to 148
changing fonts for 194
in 23
coverage area 14, 76, 227
speed-dial buttons 62–63
tasks 154
text messages 95–98
voice memos 163
wallpaper 135
CSD (circuit-switched data)
current date and time 152
current events 73
Current Privacy pick list 204,
contracts 1
coverage area alerts 71
Coverage in/out pick list 71
crashes 220
Create chats from messages
pick list 103
Create new messages as
pick list 102
creating
albums 134
bookmarks 111
business cards 60
caller ID photos 58, 59
conversion functions
(calculator) 168, 169
Copy Items dialog box 134
Copy items to pick list 134
Copy to command 134
Copy To pick list 188
copying
customer service (Palm) 241
customizing
applications 197–198
applications 187
INDE X
271
buttons 198
calendar 150–151
camera 130
dates
adding to photos 130
changing event 149
delete confirmation
messages 102
Delete Contact command 60
chat sessions 103
contacts 60
list 149
email 91–94
Keyguard 200
selecting 146
setting 155, 206
Delete From pick list 173
Delete Memo command 163
Delete Old command 90
Delete Task command 157
deleting
messaging options 102
system date and time 206
system sounds 193–194
tasks 157
sorting on 101
synchronizing 206
datestamps 130
albums 134, 135
alerts 168
daylight savings 153, 154
Daylight Savings Time check
box 154
decimal display formats
(calculator) 169
attachments 86
bookmarks 112
contacts 60
D
daily events 145
Daily Repeating Events
check box 151
cookies 117
daily schedules 145
data service icons 231, 232
data services 81, 109
data transfer 1, 76
databases 167
Date & Time Preferences
screen 147, 206
date formats 195
decompression utilities 171
Default Alarm pick list 152
Default Apps Preferences
screen 199
default settings 198
Default View pick list 73, 150
degrees 169
device names 19
events 149
favorite buttons 64
files 237
memos 163
music from playlists 142
passwords 204
playlists 142
delays 203, 231
Delete command 90, 135,
date preferences 206
Date stamp pick list 130
I N D E X
272
tasks 157
dial text 120
dialog boxes
accessing command
buttons on 29
defined 243
getting help with 241
highlighted buttons in 28
dial-up networking 77, 118–
digital cameras 131
See also camera
dimmed images 219
dimming keyboard backlight
touch-sensitive features
web page images 111,
disconnecting sync cable 24
Discovery icon 122
discussion groups 241
disk space (smartphone) 17,
Desktop software
Details button 29
Details command 135
Device Name field 66, 176
device names
Bluetooth devices and 66,
defined 243
devices
See also Bluetooth
devices; hands-free
devices; smartphone
entering passkeys and 67
Display my name in chat
window as entry field 103
Disable cookies check box
Display Options dialog box
radio frequency emissions Disable JavaScript check box
and 247, 251
displaying
synchronization and 224
Dial another call prompt 53
Dial button 46
disabling
Add New Number prompt
alerts 167
alternate characters 34
application information
application menus 29
applications 197
attachments 89
available disk space 18
bookmarks 111
Bluetooth devices 14, 68
cookies 116
Dial Extra Digits
Automatically option 63
Dial Number dialog box 46
Dial Pad 33, 43
Dial Pad button 51
Dial Preferences screen 73
Phone Lock settings 202
system sounds 193
the touchscreen 200
INDE X
273
contact information 45, 58
connections 77, 118–121,
E
error messages 239
event categories 150
favorite buttons 45
items in pick lists 30
multimedia messages 99
overdue tasks 145
personal calendar 145
private entries 205
QuickTourdocumentation
DocumentsToGoapplication
Documents To Go icon 162
Down button (navigator) 28,
downloading
attachments 89
email messages 91
multimedia messages 103
Palm-specific information
and updates 241
earpiece 7
eBooks 19
echoes 228
troubleshooting 232, 234
EditBookmarkListdialogbox
Edit Bookmarks command
Edit Category screen 59
Edit Favorite command 63
Edit Location dialog box 207
Edit Playlist dialog box 142
edit screens 29
editing. See changing
Effects pick list 130
electrostatic discharge 257
email
ringtones 69
signal strength 76
slide shows 132
text messages 98
Downloads bookmark 113
unread messages 77,
video recording time 128
voicemail messages 76
web addresses 116
web pages 109, 110
DOC files 161
Drafts button 86
drained battery icon 13
Draw on command 128
drivers 183
Due Date pick list 155
accessing 81–95, 208
adding multiple recipients
adding signatures 94
attaching photos to 86,
I N D E X
274
attaching ringtones 87
attaching voice memos to
storing attachments 236
troubleshooting 230
viewing attachments 89
viewing status of 89
viewing unread messages
entering
email addresses 85
information 16
checking 77
creating 85, 109
defining favorite buttons
for 63
deleting 90, 236
dialing from 46
downloading 91
forwarding 88
email accounts
changing 91
lock codes 201
setting email preferences
and 91
email application 81
Email icon 83
owner preferences 206
phone numbers 43–46,
opening attachments for
email options 85, 90
tasks 154
text 32, 162
emoticons 96
web addresses 110
entry fields 174
envelope icon 90
erasing information 220
error messages 238
replying to 88
requirements for 1
resending 86
restrictions for 51
scrolling 88
empty battery icon 13
empty time slots 150
emptying Trash folder 90
Enable background play
check box 141
Enable Fixed Number Dialing Escalate ring tone volume
selecting default
application for 199
setting alerts for 92
sort options for 90
check box 202
encryption 109
Eng(x) display format 169
engineering notation 169
check box 70
ESD (electrostatic discharge)
event conflicts 150
INDE X
275
Event Details dialog box 147,
events
Extra Digits option (New
Favorites) 63
Extract Call button 55
changing 149
deleting applications on
F
color-coding 149
deleting 149
incorrect time zones and
scheduling repeating 148
factory-installed applications
displaying photo or video
albums on 131
downloading to 113
formatting 189
inserting 185
installing applications on
managing files on 187
moving files to 19
opening items on 162,
removing 186
renaming 188
sending attachments to
storing information on 18,
fade setting 150
Fast mode (browser) 116
Fast mode icon 111
favorite buttons
defined 244
deleting 64
dialing with 45
displaying 45
editing 63
organizing 64
transferringtosmartphone
setting preferences for
synchronizing 145
troubleshooting 225–227
viewing categories of 150
viewing duration of 150
Exchange ActiveSync 94
Exchange Address Book 225
Exchange Servers 94, 145
exiting applications 238
Favorites tab 45
FDN list 202
features (smartphone) 1, 7–8
feedback 228
fields 30
files
transferring applications
from 187
viewing information about
expansion cards
accessing items on 187
extra digits button (Active
Call View) 51
I N D E X
276
browsing 187
checking size of 174
deleting 237
5-way navigator
accessingapplicationsand
sorting messages in 100
switching between email
accessing command
buttons and 29
incompatible applications
and 18, 19
fonts 194
movingtoexpansioncards
opening 161, 162
saving 162
entering alternate
characters and 33
highlighting and selecting
items and 28
Format Card command 189
Formats Preferences screen
streaming 114
location of 7
transferringtosmartphone
formatting expansion cards
Files application 187
financial calculator 168
financial functions 169
Find dialog box 167
Find More button 167
scrolling web pages and
selecting menu items and
forums 241
Forward all calls pick list 55,
forward icon (browser) 110
forwarding
finding
chat sessions 101
specific characters 167
text 115, 167
fixed number dialing 202
flight mode 42
Float display format 169
folder pick list 90
folders
email 88
free disk space, determining
freeing disk space 18, 236
freeing memory 117, 172,
accessing 225
locating 18, 220
firewalls 208
INDE X
277
full charge (battery) 11
receiving phone calls and
Pictures & Videos toolbar
G
restrictions for 65
switching between 68
troubleshooting 229–230
hands-free kits 251
Hands-free Preferences
screen 68
Hands-free Setup button 67
hanging up phone 51, 53, 54
hardware 1
headset button 47, 50, 65
headset jack 8
headsets
See also hands-free
devices
receiving phone calls and
restrictions for 65
hexadecimal characters 169
Hide Records option 204
hiding
private entries 204
web browser toolbar 114
High Priority command 98
highlighted buttons 28
highlighting
applications 36, 37
favorite buttons 45
items in pick lists 30
items on screen 28
menu items 29
phone numbers 46
web links 28, 110
hints 203
History command 115
History list 115
Game Volume pick list 194
GeneralPacketRadioService
(GPRS) technology 244
GIF files 131
Glossary 243
glow (highlight) 28
GPRS connections 76, 232,
GPRS technology 244
GPS receivers 124
gradients 169
grouping photos or videos
groupware 94
H
hands-free devices
home page 116
home page icon 110, 116
HotSync Log 223
HotSync manager icon 179,
checking status of 77
connecting to 66, 121
disabling or enabling 50
entering passkeys for 67
finding compatible 65
passkeys and 67
blank time slots 150
HotSync Setup button 182
I N D E X
278
HotSync technology 244
links
Inbox icons 89
synchronizing 17, 20, 23,
updating 17, 23, 165
infrared port
Incoming dialog box 93
incoming messages 104
I
icons 75, 140, 197
Ignore button 48
Ignore with Text button 48
images
See also photos; pictures
dimmed 219
downloading 113
saving 114
selecting as wallpaper 72
sending 97
storing 236
transferring to expansion
cards 19, 236
Incompatible Apps directory
Info screens 173
information
accessing 202
beaming 177
changing 16
entering 16, 32–33
erasing all 220
marking as private 204–
sending over Bluetooth
devices 174
defined 244
location of 9
inserting
battery 10
SIM card 9
installer 170
installing
applications 170–171, 213
Palm Desktop software
synchronization software
troubleshooting 234
Import from SIM command
third-party applications
VPN client software 209
alternate characters
World Clock
importing
contact information 58
phone numbers 155
INDE X
279
language settings
See also web browsing;
websites
interruptions 238
Into album pick list 134
invalid characters 96
IR communications 176
IR port
defined 244
location of 9
items in pick lists 30
items on screen
activating 28
K
large attachments 236
length functions 169
liability ii
Li-Ion battery 244
See also battery
keyboard
accessing alternate
characters on 32
dialing with 43
entering information from
illustrated 31
incremental searches
from 44, 73
links 99
See also web links
List By option 60
list screens 28, 29
See also pick lists
list view (applications) 197
listening to
voice captions 132
voice memos 164
voicemail 49
Lithium Ion battery 244
See also battery
Local button 183
locating
chat sessions 101
specific characters 167
text 115, 167
location information 206
locking 41, 200
restoring factory defaults
Keyguard 200–201
Keyguard Preferences
screen 200, 201
Known Caller pick list 70
highlighting 28
selecting 28
L
J
Label color pick list 103
land lines 48
language selection screen
laptops 182, 183
Java applets 109
JavaScript elements 116
JPEG formats 136
JPG files 131
I N D E X
280
lock codes 201
installing synchronization
software on 20
installing to expansion
cards and 172
removing applications and
requirements for 17
sending email and 81, 91
transferring music from
Media application 136
media features 14
memory slots (calculator)
Lock Device dialog box 203
Lock SIM check box 202
locking
phone 201–202
screen 201
Treo smartphone 202,
logging in to corporate
servers 208
memos
See also Memos
application; notes
creating 162
deleting 163
logic functions 169
looking up contacts 62
Lookup button 62
loops 216
uninstalling desktop
software and 222
upgrading and 19
user folders on 214
recording 163
sending voice 98
truncated text in 227
Memos application
changing fonts for 194
entering text in 162
overview 159
removing memos from
synchronizing information
in 23
Memos button 162
menu items 29
menu shortcuts 30
menus 29
losing
magnet 8
Lost Password option 205
low coverage areas 227
lowercase letters 32
Mail Service pick list 83, 84
Manage Playlists command
map (World Clock) 153
marking information as
Mask Records option 204
masks 200, 204
mathematical functions 169
M
M4V files 132
Mac systems
installing applications from
INDE X
281
Message command 47
message icons 105
message lists 101
Message Tone pick list 104
Message validity period pick
list 103
messages
messages; text
paging from 95
previewing 98
retrieving voicemail 49, 76
saving 96
selecting phone numbers
in 46
setting colors for 103
setting preferences for
deleting messages in 101
opening 36
overview 95
sorting messages in 100
status indicators for 105
viewing contacts from 57
viewing multimedia
messages in 99
messaging applications 199
messages
adding graphical elements
to 97
adding multiple recipients
for 63
for 98
storing 105
Messaging Inbox 28
messaging preferences 102–
messaging services 1, 95
metric values 169
Microphone pick list 130
Microsoft Excel 79, 87, 161
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync 94
Microsoft Exchange Servers
See Documents
application
Outlook
troubleshooting 231
Messages page
(Preferences) 102
See also text messages
Messaging application
See also multimedia
messages; text
arranging in folders 100
chat sessions and 101
checking status of 77
checking voicemail 76
defining favorite buttons
for 63
deleting 101, 102
displaying status of 105
messages
changing fonts for 194
creating chat sessions
from 101
creating multimedia
messages with 97
creating text messages
with 95
including in alerts 103
invalid characters in 96
memory consumption and
Windows systems
customizing 102
I N D E X
282
Microsoft Word documents
minutes usage information
(phone) 56
mirror 8
mismatched language
setups 215
MMS messaging services
mobile networks 227
modems 118
Modify FDN command 202
monitoring phone status 75
Month View 145, 151
Move to command 134
moving through web pages
MP3 files 138
MP3 formats 136
MP4 files 132
MPEG-4 formats 136
MPG files 132
multi-connector pin 8
multimedia message icons
multimedia messages
See also Messaging
application
addressing 97
attaching photos to 128,
attaching voice memos to
checking status of 77
creating 97
deleting 101
troubleshooting 231
viewing 99
multimedia messaging
Multimedia Messaging
System (MMS) 244
MultiMediaCard cards 185
music
adjusting volume 141
answering phone calls and
changing playlists for 142
convertingtoMP3formats
creating playlists for 141,
downloading 113
hands-free devices and 65
memory consumption and
pausing 141
selecting 141
dialing from 46
displaying details of 100
downloading 103
memory consumption and
playing 99
previewing 98
requirements for 3
restrictions for 51
retrieving 77, 98
selecting alert tones for
selecting text in 100
sending 95, 98
setting delivery
confirmation for 102
stopping 141
uploading 138
INDE X
283
Tunes
music subscription services
Music_Audio folder 139
mute button 51
My Treo icon 241
Network Preferences page
New Bookmark dialog box
O
offline synchronization 224
offline viewing (web) 111
OK button 29
online forums 241
online support (Palm) 241
opening
New button 29
New Contact command 57
New Favorite command 62
New Message dialog box 85,
Next Song button 140
No Service message 15, 76
No Service—SOS Only
message 76
Note button 58
notes
adding 58, 149, 155
storing 162
See also alerts
Alert dialog box 167
application menus 29
applications 7, 35, 36, 52,
Applications View 35
Bookmarks View 111
Call Log 46
N
names
email providers and 81
sorting on 101
synchronizing and 220,
naming
Dial Pad 43, 51
categories 197
device 19, 220
email applications 233
email attachments 161
email accounts 83
expansion cards 189
photo albums 127
photo groups 130
playlists 141
video albums 129
voice memos 163, 164
navigator buttons 7, 27
See also 5-way navigator
Network Configuration
options 104
History list 115
HotSync manager 179
on-device documentation
Pocket Tunes 140
Quick Tour 241
web browser 36, 110
World Clock 153
number formats 195
numbers
calculator display options
for 169
operating system
network connection icon 120
I N D E X
284
PALM folder 127, 128
Palm OS-compatible
applications 170
Install
Optimized Mode (browser)
P
page icon 105
Page View 112, 115, 116
paging 95
partnerships
Palm (online support) 241
Palm Desktop software
caller IDs and 59
Option key indicator 32
Option Lock indicator 32
options in pick lists 30
OrganizeFavoritescommand
organizer features 14, 42
Outbox 105
Outbox button 85
outgoing messages 105
Outlook
Palm Software Installation
CD 2, 20, 215
paper clip icon 86, 89
partial battery icon 13
Password box 203, 205
password hints 203
passwords
call barring and 72
deleting 204
defined 244
device names in 243
incorrect time zones and
installing 17, 171, 215
multipleappointmentsand
password-protecting 205
reinstalling 224
synchronizing with 16, 18,
time zones and 146
troubleshooting 215, 221
uninstalling 222
viewing and editing media
from 136
caller IDs and 59
duplicate entries in 225
entering appointments
and 146
incorrect time zones and
synchronizing with 16, 21,
time zones and 146
Outlook folders 225
owner information 206
dialing 51, 63
forgetting 203, 205
owner preferences and
requiring 202
unlocking smartphone and
INDE X
285
voicemail and 49
Paste command 43, 115
pasting
setting up DUN
getting started with 15
hands-free devices and
phone numbers 43
text 115
Pause button 141
pausing
connections for 119
transferring information to
transferring multimedia to
transferring music from
personal identification
numbers (PINs) 245
personal information 143,
locking 201–202
overview 50–51
restrictions for 51
selecting alert tones for 71
selecting ringtones for 69–
silencing ringer for 48, 193
troubleshooting 227–229
turning on and off 42
viewing Call Log for 46
viewing minutes usage for
viewing status of 75
Phone application
accessing Dial Pad in 51
contact information and
music 141
streamed content 114
video recording 130
voice memos 163, 164
computers
PDB files 170
PDF files 87, 161
pending messages 102, 105
personal computers
connecting smartphone to personalizing smartphone
creating partnerships for
downloading applications
to 171
installing applications from
installing synchronization
software on 20
See also information
personal information
managers 215, 245
personal schedules 145
See also preferences
phone
See also phone calls
answering 47
conference calls and 54
documentation
creating speed-dial
buttons from 62
customizing 72–73
defined 245
conventions for 41
displaying events in 151
I N D E X
286
overview 39
receiving 47, 53
restricting 202
dialing extra digits with 51,
running applications and
getting device 16
selecting wireless
networks from 74
setting alert tones from 71
setting dialing preferences
in 73
status icons for 75–77
using TTY 75
Phone button 7, 35, 36
Phone Call screen 47
phone calls
See also phone; phone
numbers
adding a second 53
adjusting volume for 15,
answering multiple 54
automatically answering
sending to voicemail 48
switching between active
text messages and 99
viewing details about 50
Phone Display Options
command 72
phone icons 76
light
Phone Info command 16
Phone Info screen 16
Phone Lock 201
Phone Lock command 202
Phone Lock settings 202
phone numbers
adding 52
assigning prefixes to 74
assigning to Quick Keys
highlighting 28
importing 155
pasting into Dial Pad 43
redialing most recent 46
saving 53
selecting 46
Phone Off message 42, 76
photos
See also pictures
adding as wallpaper 135
adding captions to 128
adding to albums 134
adding to contacts 135
attaching to multimedia
messages 97
barring 72
backing up 136
copying 133
disabling screen for 201
forwarding 55–56
keyboard backlight and 32
listening to music and 47
placing on hold 50, 53
clearing 43
deleting 128, 136
displaying information
about 135
downloading 113
grouping 132
creating speed-dial
INDE X
287
personalizing 128
removing from albums
repositioning 131
rotating 135
creating wallpaper with
hiding toolbar in 133
opening 131
streamed content 114
video clips 129, 132
voice captions 132
voice memos 164
organizing media with 134
saving 100, 128, 130
selecting as backgrounds
from 135
Playlists command 142
plug-ins 233
rotating photos in 135
setting default size 130
setting preferences for
sending pictures or videos Pocket Tunes application
from 133
changing playlists in 142
compatible formats for
synchronizing information
in 23
pick lists 28, 30
viewing pictures in 131
viewing slide shows in
creating playlists in 141
opening 139
overview 136
Pics&Videos icon 131
picture formats 131
Picture list 133
viewing videos in 132
PIN unlock key 245
PINs 201, 245
plain text formats 88
Play button 140
Play icon (browser) 114
playback
playing music from 140,
upgrading 137
Pocket Tunes icons 140
POP protocols 93
Power Preferences screen
PPT files 161
pictures
See also images; photos
adding to contacts 59
previewing 130
saving 100, 128, 130
setting preferences for
Pictures & Videos application
copying pictures and
videos in 134
playing
PRC files 170
precautions 247, 257, 258
multimedia messages 99
I N D E X
288
preferences
alarm tones 151
alert tones 71
applications 198, 199
buttons 198
calculator 169
camcorder 130
camera 130
contact information 60
country-specific 195
dialing 73
email 91, 93–94
events 147
protecting the screen 7
protecting Treo smartphone
Protocol pick list 84
proxy servers 117
See also applications;
specific application
preset delays 203
preset passkeys 67, 123,
pressing keyboard keys 32
pressing onscreen buttons
pTunes icon 139
PUK (PIN unlock key) 245
punctuation marks 32, 34
previewing messages 98
Previous Song button 140
hands-free devices 68
Keyguard 200
primary button assignments
prioritizing tasks 155, 157
priority levels 155, 157
priority settings 98
privacy flag 155
Privacy Mode check box 102
Private check box 204
purging old information 19
Q
owner information 206
power settings 208
system colors 196
system sounds 193
tasks 157
web browser 112
web pages 115–117
Quick Tour 241
Quick Tour icon 241
QuickText button 96
QuickText phrases 96
caution for 205
software
progress indicator bar (video
recording) 130
R
radians 169
radio frequency emissions
Prefs button 206
INDE X
289
random number generator
Refresh command 233
favorite buttons 64
files 237
memos 163
Rcl button (calculator) 169
readjusting the screen 196
receipts (messaging) 102
recently viewed web page
icon 110
reinstalling Palm Desktop
software 224
music from playlists 142
passwords 204
playlists 142
rechargeable battery 2
See also battery
Record command 177
Record Completion Date
check box 157
reinstalling third-party
applications 213, 214, 217
Remember Last Category
option 60
tasks 157
Rename Card command 189
Rename Memo command
Reminder Sound pick list 152
Record new option 98
recorder 163
recording
ringtones 70
sounds 152
voice memos 163
Records button 174
recovering information 220
recovering lost passwords
Remove from album
command 134
removing
alerts 168
repeating alarms 152
repeating event icon 148
repeating events 148, 151
replacingsmartphonebattery
attachments 86
bookmarks 112
contacts 60
Request Receipts pick list
repeating events
red paper clip icon 86
Redial list 46
cookies 117
rescheduling events 149
Reset Counters button 56
device names 19
email 90, 236
events 149
redirector (websites) 233
expansion cards 186
I N D E X
290
resizing text 110
sending with messages
roaming 70, 104
playlists 142
Resolution pick list 130
resolution settings
(camcorder) 129
video clips 129, 130
voice memos 163
web pages 111
resolution settings (camera)
See resets
restoring factory defaults 198
Return key 31
Review photos/videos pick
list 130
RF emissions 247, 248
Right button (navigator) 28,
ringer
adjusting volume 72
silencing 48
Roaming pick list 70
Rotate command 135
rotating photos 135
schedules 145
scheduling events 146, 147,
Sci(x) display format 169
scientific calculator 168
scientific notation 169
screen
accessing command
buttons on 29
activating items on 28
activating wrong features
adjusting brightness 50,
aligning 196
battery life and 14
dimming 36
disabling 200, 201
highlighting items on 28
locking 201
moving around on 25, 27
protecting 7
selecting items on 28, 30
troubleshooting 219–220,
S
Safety Statement (FCC) 247
Save As command 162
Save as Contact command
Save as Wallpaper command
Save List button 142
Save Page command 111
Save Picture command 100
Save Sound command 100
saved web page indicator
saving
calendars 100
contact information 100
files 162
images 114
turning off 193
Ringer switch 9, 42, 193
ringtone file types 97, 113
Ringtone pick list 59
ringtones
assigning to caller IDs 59
downloading 69, 113
recording 70
messages 96
phone numbers 53
INDE X
291
waking up 41
screen fonts 194
screen protectors 219
scrolling 110
scrolling preferences 116
SD cards 185
SDIO cards 185
search results 167
searching for
specific characters 167
text 115, 167
wireless services 74
Select Font dialog box 195
Select Media screen 86
Select Network command 74
selecting
sending
applications over
Bluetooth 175
calls to voicemail 48
informationoverBluetooth
photos 86, 128, 133
to chat rooms 102
video clips 130, 133
voice memos 164
Sent folder 105
alarm tones 151
applications 36, 37
chat sessions 101
dates 146
favorite buttons 45
home city 153
items in pick lists 30
items on screen 28
menu items 29
music 141
service contracts 1
setting
phone numbers 46
playlists 142
web links 110
wireless networks 74
self-portrait mirror 8
Send button 7, 46, 85
Send command 175
Send From pick list 175
Send To Handheld droplet
alarm clocks 154
settings (incompatible) 213
Setup Devices button 182
Shift/Find indicator 32
Shift/Find key 32, 167
Short Messaging Service
(SMS) 246
secure websites 109, 110,
security certificates 109
Security command 205
Security screen 203
security software 199
Select Business Card
command 60
Show Address Bar checkbox
I N D E X
292
Show Calendar event check
box 73, 151
Show Categories check box
Signal Strength icon 42
signatures 94
entering passkeys for 67
features described 7–8
Show Category Column
check box 150
Show Category List check
box 150, 151
Show Completed Items
check box 157
Show Due Dates check box
Show Due Tasks check box
Show Messages check box
Show Priorities check box
Show Records option 204,
Show SIM Phonebook check
box 60, 61
Show Time Bars check box
Show timestamps in chats
check box 103
Shutter sound pick list 130
Side button 7, 140, 163, 198
signal strength 76, 227
silencing the ringer 48
silent alerts 104
SIM card 9, 201, 246
SIT files 170, 171
slide shows 132
slides 97, 246
Slideshow Setting command
smartcard 246
smartphone
adding additional security
for 205
additional information for
battery life for 13
compatible headsets for
components of 1
connecting to PCs 16, 21
defined 41
getting free disk space 18
getting help with 211, 241
naming 19, 220
navigating around on 25
not responding 215
overview 1
phone number for 16
precautions for 10, 13,
preset buttons on 61
required items for 3
resetting 203, 215–217
settingownerpreferences
for 206
storing 7, 8
synchronization defaults
for 23
third-partyapplicationsand
transferring data to 17, 23
transferring files to 17, 18
troubleshooting 211, 241
turning on and off 11, 41
INDE X
293
unauthorized users and
unsupported connections
for 121
viewing signal strength for
SMS messaging services
software
See also applications;
synchronization
software
accessing from web
browser 113
conflicts with 223
Sort command 100
sorting
messages 90, 100
tasks 157
stereo adapters 65, 136
Sto button (calculator) 169
stopping
Sound & Alerts Preferences
screen 151, 193
Sound Off position (ringer)
multimedia playback 100
music playback 141
video recording 129
voice memo playback 164
storage solutions 165
space
Sound On position (ringer)
sound preferences 151
sounds 97, 152, 193
Sounds button 193
Space key 31
storing
images 236
messages 105
music files 139
reinstalling 224
troubleshooting 215
uninstalling 222
updating 213
Software Installation CD 2,
Sort by check box 157
Sort by Date command 101
Speakerphone button 50
special characters 32, 34, 96
specifications 259
speed-dial buttons 45, 62–63
speed-dial indicator 45
Start With pick list 112
notes 162
streaming content 114, 246
submitting web forms 110
support (Palm) 241
support (wireless service
provider) 241
statistical functions 169
statistical information 173
status icons (email) 89
I N D E X
294
Swap button 53
transferring music files
and 138
troubleshooting 220–227
wireless connections and
synchronization software
Synchronize the files setting
System Volume pick list 194
synchronizing
Syncautomaticallycheckbox
sync button 22, 24, 139
synchronization
ActiveSync and 94
Bluetooth devices and
caution for 18
changing defaults for 179,
device names and 19
overview 165
preparing for 17
T
Take new picture option 97
Take new video option 97
taking pictures 127, 127–
Tap and Drag check box 116
Task Details dialog box 154,
synchronizing
applications 23, 179
Calendar events 145
dates and time 206
offline 224
over infrared connections
photos and videos 136
time zones 206
with Outlook 16, 21, 23,
system colors 196
system dates and time 153,
tasks
See also events; Tasks
application
adding 154
assigning to attachments
checking off 155
deleting 157
recommendations for 23
removing applications and
selecting applications for
setting default application
for 198
marking as private 155
setting alarms for 155,
system requirements
personal computers 17
third-partyapplicationsand
INDE X
295
setting preferences for
viewing against photos
caller IDs and 59
compatibility with 17, 19
deleting 18, 237
getting help with 172
hard resets and 216
installing 213, 236
manually deleting 173
searching in 167
transferring to expansion
cards 19
text message icon 105
text messages
Tasks application
changing fonts for 194
opening 154
synchronizing information
in 23
Tasks button 154
Tasks Preferences screen
technical support (Palm) 241
technical support (wireless
service provider) 241
phone calls
See also messages
addressing 95
containing links 99
deleting 101
dialing from 46
receiving 104
requirements for 3
retrieving 77, 98
troubleshooting 27, 237–
VPN clients and 209
third-party applications
Thumbnail View 132, 133,
TIF files 131
time
displaying video recording
scheduling events and
selecting alert tones for
setting priority of 98
special characters and 96
troubleshooting 231
text messaging services 1,
third-party applications
5-way navigator and 27
adding security and 205
backing up information
and 18, 217
temperature conversions
text
copying 114
resizing 110
truncated 227
setting 206
synchronizing 206
viewing 152
beaming and 178
I N D E X
296
time bars 150
time formats 195
Trusted Devices button 118,
third-party applications
time preferences 206
time slots (calendar) 150
Time Zone pick list 146
Trusted Devices list 119,
trusted pairs. See
partnerships
Unknown Caller pick list 70
unlocking
the keyboard 200
Treo smartphone 202,
timestamps 103
tips 241
Tips command 241
Tips icon 241
Totals command 56
Touchscreen Preferences
screen 196
transmission delays 231
Trash folder 90
travel alarm 154
Treo smartphone. See
smartphone
trigonometric functions 169
troubleshooting 211, 241
truncated text 227
trusted devices 121
See also partnerships
turning on or off
Caps Lock 32
keyboard backlight 32
microphone 130
phone 42
speakerphone 50
touch-sensitive features
unread messages 77, 105,
untimed event icon 148
Untimed Events check box
Up button (navigator) 28, 29,
updating
application software 213
system date and time 153
World Clock 153
upgrades 17–20, 62, 223
troubleshooting 213–214
uploading music files 138
uppercase letters 32
urgent messages 105
URLs
Typing starts contacts search
option 73
U
unauthorized users 199
Unfiled category 176
uninstalling
Palm desktop software
See also web links
beaming 177
INDE X
297
entering 110, 116
in text messages 99
responding to messages
from 88
setting up accounts with
displaying information
about 135
downloading 113
grouping 132
USB ports 21
Use color for pick list 103
user discussion groups 241
user folders 214, 220, 246
User Guide 241
sorting messages with 90
switching accounts from
troubleshooting 230
Version button 174
version numbers 174
camera
Video Settings screen 130
videos
adding to albums 134
adjusting volume for 130
attaching to email 86, 130
attaching to multimedia
messages 97
backing up 136
copying 133
deleting 129, 136
jumping to specific
sections of 130
pausing 130, 132
removing from albums
saving 129, 130
setting default size 130
setting preferences for
usernames 84, 85
V
Verizon Wireless
preset buttons and 62
VersaMail application
accessing email and 81
adding attachments from
creating email messages
from 85
displaying attachments
with 89
documentation for 236
Exchange ActiveSync
accounts and 94
getting started with 81
storing 125, 128
View By pick list 198
viewing
alerts 167
alternate characters 34
application information
application menus 29
applications 197
attachments 89
overview 81
available disk space 18
I N D E X
298
bookmarks 111
virtual private networks
(VPNs) 208
Visibility pick list 123, 175
ringer 72
ringtones 70
video clips 130
voice memos 164
volume conversions
(calculator) 169
current date and time 152
error messages 239
event categories 150
favorite buttons 45
items in pick lists 30
multimedia messages 99
overdue tasks 145
adding 128, 135
background music and
playing 132
Voice Memo list 164
voicemail
VPN client software 209
W
waking up screen 41
warranty 218
See also URLs; web links
web browser
accessing email providers
and 81
auto-completion options
for 116
beaming from 177
bookmarking and 111,
checking 76
personal calendar 145
private entries 205
QuickTourdocumentation
listening to 49
retrieving messages 49,
sending calls to 48
setting alert tones for 71
setting up 48
signal strength 76
slide shows 132
Voicemail Alert pick list 71
voicemail notifications 49, 76
voicemail page icon 105
volume
alarm tones 151
alert tones 71
music 141
unread messages 77,
video recording time 128
voicemail messages 76
web addresses 116
web pages 109, 110
deleting cookies for 117
INDE X
299
dialing phone numbers
and 115
opening History list for
hiding toolbar in 114
restrictions for 109
selecting default
optimizing 234
application for 199
troubleshooting 232–234
web browsing service 1
resizing text on 110
saving 111
scrolling 110, 116
selecting most recent 112
selecting phone numbers
on 46
selecting text on 115, 116
sending email from 109
setting initial view for 115
setting preferences for
Web icon 110
selecting home page for
streaming and 114
unsupported elements for
web links
assigning to favorite
buttons 63
creating email from 109
highlighting 28
viewing connection status
for 110
Palm online support 241
selecting 110
See Blazer web browser;
web browser
web browser buttons 110
web browsing
See also web browser
dial-up networking and
web pages
viewing offline 111
web-based email 81
websites
See also web browsing
accessing Palm online
support 241
browsing to secure 110
displaying recently visited
downloading files from
changing fonts for 194
changing layouts for 110
copying text from 114
finding text on 115
opening from text
messages 99
memory consumption and
requirements for 3
restrictions for 51
installing applications from
I N D E X
300
redirectors and 233
submitting transactions
and 110, 234
accounts; wireless service
provider
voicemail and 48
voicemail services and 48
wizards 170
Week View 145
wireless connections 107,
See also connections
Bluetooth
devices hands-free
devices; smartphone
wireless modems 118
WMA formats 137
word searches 167
words, selecting 29
World Clock 152–154
World Clock icon 153
world map 153
weight conversions 169
Wide Page Mode (browser)
Windows systems
installing applications from
installing to expansion
cards and 172
Wrap Search check box 115
X
wireless service provider
onscreen message 76
phone services and 54, 55
smartphone requirements
for 1
XLS files 161
requirements for 17
synchronization defaults
for 23
Y
Year View 145
transferring music from
viewing multimedia on
technical support for 241
text messaging and 1
troubleshooting
connections to 234
troubleshooting Internet
connections and 233
Z
ZIP files 170, 171
zoom settings (camera) 127
INDE X
301
I N D E X
302
|